JP2021133141A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a special game by exercising ingenuity in display of information regarding the amount of game value granted in the special game.SOLUTION: Each time when each of plural round games for composing a jackpot game is executed, round acquisition winning ball number images 701 to 703 for suggesting the number of winning balls granted to a player in each round game are displayed in an information display area 7s (winning ball number image display part 70) of a display screen 7a (round performance screen) in which a round performance is displayed. Thus, while a jackpot game is under progress, a player can determine the number of winning balls granted (acquired) in the jackpot game in round units. Hence, interest in a jackpot game can be enhanced by attracting the player to the number of winning balls granted in each round game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 59

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and can be particularly applied to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

Conventionally, when a game ball enters a predetermined entry port (for example, a start opening), a hit / fail judgment is made, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a specific result such as a big hit, a special game such as a big hit game can be executed. The game machine that becomes is known. In a special game, a special entry port (for example, a large winning opening), which is normally impossible for the game ball to enter, becomes available for entry, and a prize ball is awarded based on the entry into the entry opening. The game value such as is given to the player. Some gaming machines of this type are configured to display the number of prize balls (the amount of game value given to the player) acquired by the player in a special game (big hit game) (for example, Patent Document 1). See).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-221113

However, the conventional display of the number of prize balls as described above merely displays the total number of prize balls acquired by the player, and does not enhance the interest of the special game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to devise a display of information regarding the amount of game value given in a special game, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the special game. It is to provide a game machine.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention has adopted the following configuration.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
A pass / fail judgment means that can execute a pass / fail judgment,
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a specific result, and
A special entry port that allows a game ball to enter during the special game,
A game value-adding means capable of adding a predetermined game value based on the ball entering the special ball entrance, and
An information display means capable of displaying game value information suggesting the amount of game value given by the game value giving means is provided.
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games.
The gist of the information display means is to display the game value information related to the round game each time the round game is executed during the special game.

According to such a gaming machine, during the execution of the special game, each time each of the plurality of round games constituting the special game is executed, the game suggests the amount of the game value given in each round game. Value information is displayed. Therefore, as the special game progresses, the player can know the amount of the game value given (acquired) in the special game in round game units. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the amount of game value given in each round game and enhance the interest of the special game.

The gaming machine of means 2 is the gaming machine of means 1 described above.
The information display means displays the game value information related to the executed round game in round game units until a predetermined display period including a predetermined period after the final round game is completed has elapsed. Is the gist.

According to such a gaming machine, game value information related to the executed round game is displayed in units of round games until a predetermined display period including a predetermined period after the last round game in the special game elapses. .. Therefore, even after all the rounds of the special game are completed, the player can know the amount of the game value given (acquired) in each of the executed round games. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the result of each round game.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine of means 1 or 2 described above.
The special game is configured so that a predetermined amount of game value can be given to each round game.
The gist of the information display means is that when the amount of game value given in the round game exceeds the specified amount, the game value information is displayed in a special display mode different from the usual one.

According to such a gaming machine, when the amount of the gaming value given in the round game exceeds the specified amount, the display mode of the gaming value information is different from the usual one. Therefore, as the special game progresses, the player can know whether or not the amount of the game value given in each round game exceeds the specified amount by just looking at the game value information. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the game value information displayed for each round game and to give the player a sense of gain.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine of means 3 described above.
When the amount of the game value given in the round game exceeds a specific amount larger than the specified amount, the information display means displays the game value information in a specific special display mode different from the special display mode. Is the gist.

According to such a gaming machine, when the amount of game value given in a round game exceeds a specific amount larger than a specified amount, the game value information is displayed in a specific special display mode different from the above-mentioned special display mode. Will be done. Therefore, the player can know whether or not the amount of the game value given in each round game exceeds the specific amount by just looking at the game value information while the special game progresses. As a result, it becomes possible to further attract the player's interest to the game value information displayed for each round game.

According to the above invention, it is possible to enhance the interest of special games.

It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is the figure which shows the display which the game machine includes. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the game machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the big winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot judgment table, (B) is a jackpot type judgment table, (C) is a reach judgment table, (D) is a normal symbol hit judgment table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. It is a pattern selection table. It is a table which shows the fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of starting and entering a ball. It is a flowchart of a normal figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit / miss judgment process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a process during a normal symbol change. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessory processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 standby processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 changing process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 determination process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 standby processing. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart of a random number shift process. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 changing process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 1. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is a table which shows the symbol type of the production symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the fluctuation effect of a state A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the fluctuation effect of a state B. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the state C (effect mode C), and (B) is a table showing the type of the second effect pattern (battle effect pattern of effect mode C). It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the fluctuation effect of a state C. It is a flowchart of a small hit prize ball counting process. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a round effect screen, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round winning prize ball number image, and (C) is an enlarged view of an information display area. It is a flowchart of a jackpot prize ball counting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the ending effect screen, (A) is the figure which shows the ending effect screen when the image of the number of small hit winning prize balls is displayed (the first period), (B) is the figure which shows the big hit winning prize ball It is a figure which shows the ending effect screen when a few images are displayed (the second period), (C) is the figure which shows the ending effect screen when the total number of prize balls image is displayed (the third period). be. It is a flowchart of hold look-ahead processing at the time of small hit occurrence which concerns on Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the small hit medium suggestion effect screen which concerns on Example 2, (A) shows the small hit medium suggestion effect screen when a small hit game is started, (B) is a small hit game Shows a suggestion effect screen during a small hit under the situation where It is a suggestion effect pattern determination table in a small hit according to Example 2.

Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. In the following, the present invention relates to a pachinko gaming machine capable of performing a winning game in which a predetermined amount of game value (for example, a prize ball) can be given to a player when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display of the symbol. An example in which is applied will be described.

In the following description, the front side (front side) is simply the front side (front side) when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, and is the side (front side) where the player is located during the game. Further, the rear side (rear side) is simply the back side (back side) side when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. Furthermore, the upper side (upper side), lower side (lower side), left side (left side), and right side (right side) are the upper, lower, left, and right directions when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. For example, it refers to the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side in FIGS. 1 and 3.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50, and the gaming board 2 is a gaming machine. It is detachably configured from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the game board 2 is removed from the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for attaching a game board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko game machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island equipment, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56. Further, the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side end side (left side of the paper in FIG. 1) in the vertical direction, and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side end side as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

The front frame 51 includes a launch handle 60 for launching a game ball with a launch intensity according to the amount of operation (rotation angle) of the player, and a hit ball capable of supplying the stored game ball to the launcher side. A supply plate (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball tray (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b (collectively, these two effect buttons) that can be operated by the player during execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. (It is also simply referred to as “directing button 63”). As for the plurality of effect buttons, the effect buttons to be used can be used properly according to the type of game effect. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the embodiment of the present embodiment, as long as it can detect the input from the player, or the input detecting means (for example, the player directly contacts the button portion to input the input). It may be a haunting type, a touch sensor type, etc.), or it may be a non-contact type input detecting means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects that a part of the player's body is in close proximity and inputs. ..

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). As shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 face the display screens 71a and 72a toward the front (player side) of the front frame 51 so that the player can easily see them, respectively. It is installed so as to project and to be inclined outward. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, similarly to the image display device 7 described later, play a game effect according to the execution / non-execution of the game, the situation of the game, the game effect to be executed, and the like. (Character, production design, etc.), demo production, game information (acquired ball launch information, number of rounds, number of consecutive villas, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability / explanation of game production, etc.), game machine settings Information (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) is displayed. The second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display the same information as when displaying different information among the information. Further, the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may display the same information as when different information is displayed. be. Further, any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information, and the remaining one displays different information. In some cases. It should be noted that any or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as an “image display device”. Further, the image display device 7 is also referred to as a "main display device" or a "main display device", and one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 is referred to as a "secondary display device" or "secondary display device". Also called a "sub-display device".

The image display device 7 is provided in the inner region of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in the outer region of the game area 3. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end portion) is attached to the front frame 51 via the second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). Has been done. Therefore, the hinges 75 for the upper and lower second image display devices can be rotated in the left-right direction as an axis. More specifically, the configuration is such that it can rotate a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) to the right from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because the second image display device 71, which is provided so as to project forward of the front frame 51 when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56 as axes, pachinko. This is a configuration to prevent damage due to collision with hall equipment (ball lending machine, inter-table equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (left side of the paper in FIG. 1) of the game machine 1. .. On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the end on the open side) is fixed to the front frame 51 and is non-rotatable.

The game board 2 is formed with a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down, surrounded by a rail member 4. Further, the game board 2 is provided with a board surface lamp 5 for decoration. A plurality of game nails 16 for guiding a game ball are projected in the game area 3. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

An image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back surface side of the game board 2. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as an “effect symbol display unit”) in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are set as the subject of the game in the game state according to the game state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state, low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state). The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol described later). The production symbol 8L is also referred to as a "left symbol", the production symbol 8C is also referred to as a "middle symbol", and the production symbol 8R is also referred to as a "right symbol". It is also called "directed design (directed symbol 8)".

The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the game state is in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A, which will be described later). As will be described in detail later, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting port (second starting port 21) is set lower than in the high base state, and it is special. The probability of hit / fail judgment of the symbol (first special symbol hit / fail judgment and second special symbol hit / miss judgment) is low probability (also referred to as "predetermined probability"), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is the fluctuation of the first special symbol. It is set longer than the time (more than twice) (all deviation fluctuations are 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal state, rather than launching a game ball into the right game area 3B (second game area) and letting the ball enter the second starting port 21 to fluctuate the second special symbol, the left game area 3A (first game area) It is considered to be advantageous for the player to perform a game in which a game ball is launched into the game area) and entered into the first starting port 20 to display the first special symbol in a variable manner. That is, it can be said that the normal state is a gaming state in which the first special symbol (effect symbol) is mainly displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, in the normal state, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b are supposed to perform variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol. On the other hand, in a gaming state other than the normal state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state or high accuracy low base state, which will be described later), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b are the second special. The variable display and the stop display are to be performed in synchronization with the symbol.

The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of this embodiment are each composed of numerical symbols (symbol types) from "1" to "9", and these numerical symbols are displayed in order. Specifically, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by scrolling the numerical symbols in the order of "1" → "2" ... "8" → "9" (ascending order). When it reaches "9", it returns to "1" and the scroll display is repeated until the end of fluctuation (stop display). Then, depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8 that are stopped and displayed (derived display) via the variable display, the first special symbol display 41a (“first special symbol display unit”) to be described later is used. The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display unit") of the second special symbol. The result of the variation display (result of the special symbol winning / failing judgment) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. Details such as variable display of the effect symbol 8 will be described later.

Here, any or all of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol 8 are referred to simply as "design" or "identification information". In addition, the ordinary symbol is also called "general symbol" or "ordinary identification information", the special symbol is also called "special symbol", and the first special symbol is "special diagram 1" or "first special symbol". "Or" first identification information ", and the second special symbol is also referred to as" special figure 2 "," second special figure "or" second identification information ". Further, an image display device (any or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72) for displaying the effect symbol 8, and a first special symbol display for displaying the first special symbol. It also refers to any or all of 41a and the second special symbol display 41b for displaying the second special symbol, and is also referred to as "variable display means" or "identification information display means". Further, the special symbol hit / fail judgment is also simply referred to as "hit / fail judgment" or "first hit / fail judgment", and the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the special symbol hit / fail judgment is referred to as "hit / fail judgment means" or "first hit / miss judgment means". Also called.

The stop display mode of the effect symbol 8 can be defined as follows. For example, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (first specific result), the effect symbol is set with a three-digit identical (doublet) symbol (also referred to as "big hit symbol") such as "777". Display stop. In addition, in the case of a small hit (second specific result), a preset chance symbol such as "335" or a small hit dedicated symbol such as "3 ★ 3" (also referred to as a "small hit symbol") is used. The production symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, instead of the mode in which the small hit dedicated symbol is stopped and displayed when a small hit occurs, the symbol in the same mode may be stopped and displayed for the small hit symbol and the off symbol. In addition, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit symbols (first small hit symbol, second small hit symbol) can be distinguished from each other. May be stopped and displayed, or the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so as to make it difficult to distinguish them. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is incorrect (non-specific result), at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is different from the different symbol (also referred to as "missing symbol"). ) To stop and display the production design.

As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (result of the special symbol winning / failing determination) by looking at the stopped display of the effect symbol. That is, in general, the player directly grasps the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b (see FIG. 4). Instead, the effect symbol displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b is viewed and grasped. Further, as the mode of variable display of the effect symbol, for example, a mode of scrolling display in the up / down, left / right, diagonal directions, etc., a mode of performing the effect display using only the first effect symbol display unit 7b, and a mode of the first effect symbol display unit 7b. In addition to this, it has an aspect in which one or both of the second effect symbol display unit 71a and the third effect symbol display unit 72a are used for effect display. In addition to this, it may have an aspect in which the effect is displayed using only the second effect symbol display unit 71a or the third effect symbol display unit 72a.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to the game effect using the effect pattern as described above (effect symbol game effect), the hit game effect (big hit game, small hit game) executed in association with the hit game (big hit game, small hit game) Big hit game production, small hit game production) and demonstration production for waiting for customers are displayed. In addition, in the production pattern game production, the winning game production, and the demonstration production, in addition to the production symbols such as numbers, the production images other than the production symbols such as the background image and the character image are also displayed. Further, as will be described in detail later, the game state (state A, state B or state C), the state in which the game ball is fired in the left game area 3A to play the game, and the game ball is fired in the right game area 3B for the game. The display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b is different depending on the state in which the operation is performed. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously) in a variable manner. Therefore, for example, a state. In A (low accuracy low base state), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable manner and stopped in synchronization with the first special symbol, and state B or state C (low accuracy high base state, high). In the high-accuracy base state or the high-accuracy low-base state), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner and stopped in synchronization with the second special symbol. Such a type of gaming machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variablely displayed in parallel (simultaneously) is also referred to as a "simultaneous variable machine (parallel variable machine)".

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying the first effect hold 9a according to the number of stored first special figure hold described later, and a first effect hold display unit, which will be described later, are displayed. A second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) for displaying the second effect hold 9b according to the number of stored second special figure hold 9b is provided. Depending on the display mode (number of displays) of the first effect hold 9a or the second effect hold 9b in the effect hold display area, the first special figure hold displayed by the first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4) described later. The number of memories of the second special figure hold and the number of memories of the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b (see FIG. 4) can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect (reach effect, etc.) to be executed. In addition, only one of the first effect hold display unit and the second effect hold display unit (for example, only the effect hold display unit corresponding to the special symbol that is the main variable display) may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll is provided. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet, receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp inlet, discharges the game ball from the warp outlet, and guides the game ball to the stage portion 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 has a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage portion 11, and can enter the first starting port 20 described later. Further, above the center decorative body 10, an illuminated member (board lamp 5) such as an LED is provided and can be turned on according to the game state, and a decorative member 13 in the shape of characters, figures, or the like is arranged. There is.

A movable decorative member 14 that is above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 is provided so as to be able to move along with the game effect. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (predetermined) with the execution of the game effect having a relatively high possibility of hitting. The movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 becomes visible. As a result, the player enhances the interest in the game and raises the expectation for the hit.

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 provided with a non-variable first starting port 20 in which the ease of entering the game ball does not change is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct ( The first special symbol hit / fail determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail determination.

A gate 28 through which a game ball can pass (enter) is provided above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3. The game ball that has entered from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a “combination gate” or an “operating gate”) for starting a big hit game. When the game ball passes through the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation condition) is satisfied, the normal symbol is determined as to whether or not the game is correct. (Also referred to as "second hit / fail judgment") is executed, the normal symbol starts variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment. When the hit normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opens) and the second starting port 21 is opened. The control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the normal symbol hit / miss judgment as to whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (opened) to open the second starting port 21 is a "hit / miss judgment means" or "second It is also called "win / fail judgment means". The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game.

Further, as will be described in detail later, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29), the function as the start gate 29 is exhibited when the condition for executing (starting) the jackpot game is satisfied. Only when it is (also called "big hit executable state" or "big hit standby state"). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (big hit standby state) is not satisfied, the control process related to the normal symbol is performed, and the big hit start process is not executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the jackpot standby state), the standby jackpot game is started, and the predetermined jackpot (No. 1) A round game is executed in which the 1st big winning opening 30) is opened (the ball can be entered).

In the game area 3 on the right side of the center decoration 10 (right game area 3B) in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29), a first large winning opening 30 is provided. A large winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable entrance") is provided. The first big winning device 31 operates when the big hit game is executed, and is a winning device for the big hit game.

Specifically, the first prize-winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and the opening / closing member 32 opens and closes the first prize-winning opening 30. The opening / closing member 32 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is closed and the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is covered with the game ball. Can pass through. As shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 without entering the first large winning opening 30. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and is retracted in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form the first large winning opening 30. It will be in an open state with the entrance open. As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 will enter the first large winning opening 30. In this way, the opening / closing member 32 that opens / closes the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is a retractable opening / closing member, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game ball that has flowed down is smoothly moved to the first large. It is possible to enter the ball into the winning opening 30 and guide the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) in an arbitrary direction (the second starting opening 21 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes. It should be noted that the first large winning opening 30 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, in the first large winning device 31 (first variable ball entry port), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32 allows the game ball to enter the ball in an inaccessible state (closed state) and the game ball to enter. It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first large winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game ball does not change. A second fixed winning device 25 including a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct ( The second special symbol hit / fail judgment) is executed, the second special symbol starts the variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / miss judgment.

As shown in FIG. 3, the game ball passage is branched below (downstream) of the first large winning opening 30, the upper game ball passage where the third starting port 26 is provided, and the second game ball passage. A lower game ball passage where a starting port 21 and a second large winning opening 35 are provided is formed. Among them, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third start port 26 by contacting the game nail 16 provided in the vicinity of the third start port 26, or enters the third start port 26. It flows down downstream without entering 26 and flows into the out port 34. Since the third starting port 26 is a fixed winning device capable of constantly entering a ball, for example, during a big hit game in which a ball can be entered into the first big winning opening 30, a ball is entered into the first big winning opening 30. It is possible to put (hold) the game ball that has not been played into the third start opening 26 and execute the variable display of the second special symbol immediately after the end of the big hit game.

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first large winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game ball changes. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable start port” or a “variable start port”) including the second start port 21 of the formula is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the accuracy of the second special symbol is determined (the second). 2 Special symbol hit / fail judgment) is executed, the second special symbol starts variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.

The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an “opening / closing member”), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By the opening / closing operation of the movable member 23, the second starting port 21 changes from the first aspect (closed state) to the second aspect (open state) in which the game ball is more likely to enter than the first aspect. It can be changed. In the present embodiment, the second starting port 21 is capable of entering the game ball only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and is unable to enter the game ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. .. The second starting port 21 is perfect when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the open state. It does not have to be the one that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

Like the opening / closing member 32, the movable member 23 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) gaming ball passage, and in the closed state, the entrance of the second starting port 21 is closed and the movable member 23 is closed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the 23. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21 and plays a game. It flows down the area downstream.

The movable member 23 is driven by the second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and when retracted toward the back surface of the game board 3, the movable member 23 is in an open state in which the inlet portion of the second starting port 21 is opened. .. As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 enters the second starting port 21. In this way, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and when it is in the open state (when opened), the game ball that has flowed down can be seen. The ball is smoothly entered into the second starting port 21, and the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) is moved in an arbitrary direction (for example, the second large winning opening 35) by the inclined upper surface passage. Induce.

In the game area 3 on the right side of the center decoration body 10 (right game area 3B) in the game area 3, the game area below (downstream) the second start opening 21 is provided with the second big prize opening 35. A device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable entrance") is provided. The second large winning device 36 operates when the small hit game is executed, and is a winning device for the small hit game.

Specifically, the second special winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and the opening / closing member 37 opens and closes the second special winning opening 35. Like the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) gaming ball passage, and in the closed state, the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 is closed and the opening / closing member is closed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the 37. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 without entering the second special winning opening 35. It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and is in an open state in which the entrance portion of the second large winning opening 35 is opened by retracting toward the back surface of the game board 3. Become. As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 will enter the second large winning opening 35. In this way, the opening / closing member 37 that opens / closes the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down when in the open state (when opened). Is smoothly entered into the second prize opening 35, and the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) is guided in an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. Is possible. It should be noted that the second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. That is, the second large winning device 36 (the second variable ball entry port) is in a state in which the game ball cannot enter (closed state) and a ball in which the game ball can enter due to the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 37. It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

Further, a plurality (three) general entrances 27 are provided in the lower part of the area (left game area 3A) on the left side of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3.

The game area 3 in which various entrances and the like are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. Can be divided into. A method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is also called "left-handed", and a game in which the game is advanced by left-handed is also called a "left-handed game". On the other hand, a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is also referred to as "right-handed", and a game in which the game is advanced by right-handed is also referred to as "right-handed game".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a left-handed hit is performed in a normal state (low probability low base state, state A) at the start of the game, and the ball is aimed at entering the first starting port 20 (left-handed game). Then, when the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the first starting port 20 (first special symbol hit / fail judgment) becomes a big hit and the big hit game is executed, a right-handed hit is made and the first big winning opening 30 is entered. Aim for the ball (right-handed game). In addition, even when the game state after the big hit game is in the low-accuracy high-base state or the high-accuracy low-base state, right-handed is performed and the ball enters the gate 28, the second starting port 21, or the third starting port 26. Aim (right-handed game). Further, even when a big hit is made in the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol hit / fail judgment) based on the entry of the ball into the second start opening 21 or the third start opening 26 and the big hit game is executed, the right-handed hit is performed and the first Aim to enter the large winning opening 30 (right-handed game), and even when a small hit is performed and a small hit game is executed, right-handed is aimed at entering the second large winning opening 35 (right). Hitting game). Then, when a game ball enters any of the first start opening 20, the second start opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, the second big winning opening 35, and the general entry opening 27, each entry is made. A predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as "prize balls" or "game value") are paid out (given) at the ball mouth. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (amount of game value) paid out based on the entry into the first large winning opening 30 is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35. It is set more than the number (amount of game value). Specifically, the first big winning opening 30 pays out 15 prize balls for one winning ball, and the second big winning opening 35 pays out 10 prize balls for one winning ball. The prize ball is to be paid out.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game value given based on the entry of the game ball into various entrances (winning openings) is defined as the prize ball (game ball), but the game value is actually It does not have to be the game ball of the above, and for example, it is possible to give the prize ball (number of prize balls) to the player as numerical data (numerical data). As a gaming machine that imparts gaming value as numerical data in this way, a so-called enclosed pachinko gaming machine can be exemplified.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main indicator 40 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. The main display 40 includes a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) that displays and stops the first special symbol, and a second special symbol that displays and stops the second special symbol. A display 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) that displays a variable display and a stop display of a normal symbol are included. Further, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored numbers of the hit / fail determination information (first special symbol hold) related to the first special symbol, and a hit / fail determination information related to the second special symbol (first special symbol hold). Includes a second special figure hold indicator 43b that displays the number of stored items of the second special figure hold) and a normal figure hold indicator 44 that displays the number of stored items of the normal symbol display 42 that is on hold (normal figure hold). It has been. Further, the main display 40 includes a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit, and the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. A round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed when the result of It includes a launch direction indicator 47 that indicates whether it should be in a state where it should be hit or a state where it should be left-handed. The various indicators included in the main indicator 40 are displayed and controlled by the main control unit described later.

The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. In the following description, one or both of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be referred to as a special symbol. Further, the special symbol display unit 41 may refer to either or both of the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, and the first special symbol hold indicator 43a and the second special symbol hold display 43a and the second special symbol display may be referred to. The special figure holding display unit 43 may refer to either one or both of the display 43b.

In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed, and the special symbol (stop symbol) displayed as a stop display (deriving display) is used to move to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. The result of the winning / failing judgment (special symbol winning / failing judgment, big hit lottery) based on the entry of the ball is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct. When the stop symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), it is an open pattern according to the type of the specific special symbol displayed as a stop. A special game (big hit game, small hit game) that opens the 1st big winning opening 30 or the 2nd big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

Here, the first big winning opening 30 (first big winning device 31) is also referred to as "first special winning opening", and the second big winning opening 35 (second big winning device 36) is referred to as "first big winning device 36". It is also referred to as "2 special entrance", and refers to either or both of the first special entrance and the second special entrance, and is also simply referred to as "special entrance". Further, a special game in which the first special winning opening 30 is opened (the first large winning device 31 is operated) is also referred to as a "first special game" or a "big hit game", and the second large winning opening 35 is opened. The special game (in which the second special winning device 36 operates) is also referred to as a "second special game" or a "small hit game". Further, it also refers to either one or both of the first special game and the second special game and is also simply referred to as a "special game", and refers to either or both of the big hit game and the small hit game and is also simply referred to as a "hit game". ..

As shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination. For example, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is the first big hit (4R first big hit), the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off, and the second big hit (4R first big hit) is turned on. When it becomes 2 big hits), the 4 LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off, and when it is off, the 2 LEDs of "lo" are turned on and the rest are turned off. do. Further, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination. Similar to the first special symbol display 41b, the stop display mode is defined as a different display mode depending on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination (big hit, small hit, miss). Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before the derivation display), the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, light from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED can be turned on so that

Here, among the stop display modes (display results of variable display) of special symbols and effect symbols, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit (big hit or small hit) is referred to as "hit mode". , "Specific mode", "Specific display mode" or "Specific display result", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is out of order is referred to as "outside mode" or "non-specific mode". , "Non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result". Further, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit is also referred to as the "big hit mode" or the "first specific mode", and the stop corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit. The display mode is also referred to as a "small hit mode" or a "second specific mode". Further, among the results of the special symbol winning / failing judgment, the big hit is also referred to as the "first specific result", the small hit is also referred to as the "second specific result", and the deviation is also referred to as the "non-specific result". It also refers to either or both of the first specific result and the second specific result, and is also simply referred to as "specific result".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various information such as a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct (“acquisition information”” is obtained based on the entry of the game ball. (Also referred to as) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure holding storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Specifically, if the information is acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a as the first special figure reservation (also referred to as "first acquisition information"). If the information is acquired based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 21, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b as the second special figure reservation (also referred to as "second acquisition information"). An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in each of the present embodiments is four. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are also generally referred to as "acquisition information storage means". ..

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the special symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not corresponding to the special symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry, that is, each special During the execution of the variable display of the symbol or the execution of the special game based on any of the special symbol winning / failing judgments, the right of the special symbol winning / failing judgment for the incoming ball is reserved (reserved) up to a predetermined number (4 each). ) Can be done. The number of such special figure hold indicators is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b.

As shown in FIG. 4, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold, the first It displays the number of special figure pending. For example, when the number of holds is 0, both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, such as “u ● v □”. Further, when the number of holds is 3, the display mode can be such that both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u ● v ●". Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green as in "u ▲ v ▲" to set the display mode. Further, the second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the second special figure hold, the second special figure hold is held. It displays a number. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: off, ●: red on, ▲: green on), and the number of holds 1 to 1. No. 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure holding indicator 43a.

The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display 42, after displaying the normal symbol fluctuatingly for a predetermined time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the normal symbol hit / fail determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is determined by the stopped display normal symbol (stop symbol). Notify. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is correct. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. The means for executing the auxiliary game (main control unit) is also referred to as the auxiliary game executing means (specific game executing means). The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit / miss determination depending on the lighting mode. For example, when the determination result is a hit, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed when both LEDs are lit, such as "s ■ t ■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). Further, when the determination result is out of order, an out-of-order normal symbol in a mode in which only the t LED is lit, such as "s □ t ■", is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined fluctuation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off.

When the game ball passes through the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as “acquired information”) such as a random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct based on the passage of the game ball. Various types of information are temporarily stored as a normal figure hold in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set for the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not corresponding to the normal symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of passage, that is, during the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Can reserve (hold) the right to judge whether or not a normal symbol is correct for the passage of a predetermined number of cards. The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and the normal figure hold is performed by turning on the LEDs according to the number of the normal figure hold. Display the number. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is such that both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: turn off, ●: turn on red, ▲: turn on green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of q is turned off and the LED of r is turned on in red as in "q □ r ●". Further, the number of hold numbers 2 to 4 is also defined in the same manner as in the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a main control board 80 (“main control unit”, “main control unit”, “main control unit”, or “main control unit”, which controls game values such as special symbol winning / failing determination, normal symbol winning / failing determination, and transition of game state. (Also referred to as "game control unit"), sub-control board 90 (also referred to as "sub-control unit", "sub-control unit", or "effect control unit") that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and the game. A payout control board 110 (also referred to as a "payout control unit") that controls payout of balls, an effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, a symbol displayed on the effect display 102, and a third effect hold indicator. It includes an image control board 100 (image control unit) that controls display of the 103a, the fourth effect hold display 103b, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case for storing the main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear surface side (back surface side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case, there is a main control board storage case. An image control board storage case containing the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub control board storage case containing the sub control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. It is provided. Further, a payout control board case for accommodating the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for accommodating the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

On the main control board 80, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure holding storage unit 85 (first special figure holding storage unit 85a and second special figure holding storage unit 85b) and the normal drawing holding storage unit 86. ..

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and a signal is output to each solenoid from the main control board 80. Specifically, the sensors include a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a), a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and the like. The general entry sensor 27a is connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "game ball detecting means".

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first large winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second large winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35. The general ball entry sensor 27a is provided in each general ball entry port 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general ball entry port 27. When these sensors (game ball detection means) detect a game ball, the number of balls entering the corresponding entry port can be counted based on the detection, and the occurrence of entry into the corresponding entry port can be performed. It is possible to send the indicated ball entry detection command to the sub-control board 90.

Further, as the solenoids, the second starting port solenoid 24, the first winning opening solenoid 33, and the second winning opening solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36. Further, on the main control board 80, a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and the like are commonly used. Figure Hold indicator 44, round indicator 45, game status indicator 46, launch direction indicator 47, and hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main indicators 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands (prize ball payout command, etc.) to the payout control board 110, and receives a signal from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. A payout device 120 for paying out prize balls and rental balls and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). 112 is connected. The launcher 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see FIG. 1). When the launch handle 60 of the launch device 112 is operated by the player, the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the launch handle 60, and the launch volume 115 detects the amount of rotation of the launch handle 60. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115. The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually on the left side of the paper in FIG. 1), and the player performs a predetermined ball lending operation to insert a prepaid card (game). It enables ball lending based on the information stored in the value storage medium) or the like.

The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 uses the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Drive to pay out prize balls and pay out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. In this way, the payout control microcomputer 116 functions as a "game value adding means" that controls the payout device 120 to give a prize ball (game value) to the player.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a production control one-chip microcomputer 91 (hereinafter, “effect control microcomputer”) that controls the production of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub-control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. There is. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 is used as the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, third image display device 72, effect display 102, third effect hold display 103a, and fourth effect hold display 103b. Let control be performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including production symbols, reserved symbols, etc.). Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, the display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display 102 is composed of two LEDs, one of which performs a variable display and a stop display in accordance with the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED displays the variable display and the stop display of the second special symbol. In a display mode in which variable display and stop display are performed according to the stop display, and the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct) is shown by turning on / off the corresponding LED or by color. Stop display. Similarly, the third effect hold indicator 103a and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b also consist of two LEDs, respectively. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs or combining colors, the third effect hold display 103a is displayed by the number of holds displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c and the first special figure hold display 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode that indicates the same number of holds as the number of holds. Further, the fourth effect hold display 103b is display-controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holds as the number of holds displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the number of holds displayed by the second special figure hold display 43b. NS.

The character symbol is displayed on a part or substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit) to display the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit). By covering a part or substantially the entire part), a part or all of the effect symbol 8, the first effect hold display unit 9c, or the second effect hold display unit 9d may be invisible. be. Even in such a covered state, these effect display 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, and so on, so that the variation display and stop display of the effect symbol, the number of hold items, and the like can be surely confirmed. A fourth effect holding indicator 103b is provided. The display modes of the effect display 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b are always visible without being hindered by the operation of the movable decorative member 14. It has become. Further, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the light emission pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinguishing, light emitting color, etc.) of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Also referred to as lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined operation pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control or operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, the sub-control board 90 has a first effect button detection switch 63c and a first effect button detection switch 63c that detect that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) has been operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.). 2 The effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

Next, the control related to the determination of whether or not the special symbol is correct in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. As a result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct, it has "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". When the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination is "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41, and when it is "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, when the result of the special symbol hit / miss determination is "off", the "off symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. When it is determined as a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol winning / failing judgment, a "special game" in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 opens in an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol displayed as stopped is played. Will be executed. The special game executed as a big hit is a big hit game, and the special game executed as a small hit is a small hit game.

There are a plurality of types of hits, and when the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination is a specific result, the hit type corresponding to the specific result is determined. That is, different hit types (including large hits and small hits) are obtained depending on whether the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is the first specific result or the second specific result. In addition, the special game to be executed may differ depending on the hit type, the amount of game value that can be acquired differs depending on the special game, or the game state after the special game ends may differ. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, as the hit types of this embodiment, "4R (round) 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", There are "2R 5th jackpot", "2R 6th jackpot", "2R 7th jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot".

In the "15R 3rd big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 15 times. In "4R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot" and "4R 4th jackpot", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 4 times. For "2R 5th big hit", "2R 6th big hit", "2R 7th big hit" and "2R 8th big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 2 times. Is. In this way, in the big hit, the first big winning opening 30 is opened and the second big winning opening 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first big winning opening 30 is also referred to as a "big hit big winning opening (big hit variable entry opening)".

The "4R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot" and "4R 4th jackpot" are also collectively referred to as "4R jackpot", "2R 5th jackpot", "2R 6th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot". "And" 2R 8th jackpot "are also collectively referred to as" 2R jackpot ", and" 15R 3rd jackpot "is also simply referred to as" 15R jackpot ".

Further, for "4R 1st jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", "2R 5th jackpot" and "2R 6th jackpot", the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game will be described later. Move to the high probability state of (activate the probability change function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also referred to as "probability variation jackpots (high probability jackpots)". The high probability state (probability change function) continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, "4R 2nd big hit", "2R 7th big hit", and "2R 8th big hit" shift the game state after the end of the big hit game to the low probability state described later (the probability change function is not activated). .. Therefore, these three types of jackpots are also referred to as "low probability jackpots (low probability jackpots, normal jackpots)".

In addition, "4R 1st jackpot", "15R 3rd jackpot" and "4R 4th jackpot" set the variation time of the 2nd special symbol to a short time after the end of the jackpot game. While the "function" is activated, the "high base generation function" is not activated. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (state C). The high accuracy and low base state will continue until the next big hit occurs. The game playability in the high-accuracy low-base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but as described above, a right-handed game in which a game ball is launched toward the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged is performed. Then, a small hit is generated (frequently) by the second special symbol winning / failing determination, and the game ball can be increased in the period between the previous big hit and the next big hit (between the big hits). Such a game period is also referred to as a "specific period". By making small hits occur frequently in the high accuracy and low base state (specific period) between the big hits, it can be expected that many game balls will be acquired in a short period of time by the small hits. That is, the specific period is a game period that is advantageous to the player, and is a period that can enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the "4R second big hit", "2R 7th big hit" and "2R 8th big hit" activate the "second special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" after the end of the big hit game. As a result, the game state after the end of these big hit games becomes a low accuracy and high base state. In the case of "4R 2nd jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot", the low accuracy high base state ends based on the occurrence of the next jackpot or the execution of the variation display of the special symbol 100 times. .. When the special symbol variation display ends based on being executed 100 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). Further, in the case of "2R 7th jackpot", the low accuracy high base state ends based on the occurrence of the next jackpot or the execution of the variation display of the special symbol 50 times. When the special symbol variation display ends based on being executed 50 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). Further, as will be described in detail later, in the low accuracy and high base state, the second special symbol is performed by performing a right-handed game in which a game ball is launched toward the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged as described above. This is the period during which the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of the next big hit after making a hit / fail judgment.

Further, the "2R 5th jackpot" and the "2R 6th jackpot" activate the "second special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" after the end of the jackpot game. As a result, the game state after the end of these big hit games becomes a high accuracy and high base state. In the case of "2R 5th jackpot", the "2nd special symbol time saving function" continues until the next jackpot occurs, and the "high base generation function" either causes the next jackpot or changes in the special symbol. It ends based on the display being executed 50 times. Also, as mentioned above, the "probability change function" will continue until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of "2R 5th jackpot", after the jackpot game is completed, until the variation display of the special symbol has passed 50 times, the high accuracy high base state is set, and even after 50 times, the jackpot does not occur. , The game state is set to the high accuracy and low base state.

In the high-accuracy high-base state, as in the low-accuracy high-base state, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made by performing a right-handed game in which a game ball is launched toward the right game area 3B, and the next big hit. It is a period in which the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of. Further, as described above, the high accuracy and low base state is an advantageous period for a player who can expect to acquire a large number of game balls in a short period of time by causing small hits frequently by right-handed games. In this embodiment, it is assumed that there are more game balls that can be acquired in the high accuracy and low base state than those that can be acquired in the high accuracy and high base state. Therefore, if the big hit does not occur until the number of times of variation display of the special symbol after the end of the big hit game has passed 50 times, the game state changes to a more advantageous game state (specific period) than before.

In addition, the "2R 6th jackpot" is in a high-accuracy high-base state until the variation display of the special symbol has passed 100 times after the jackpot game is completed, and if the jackpot does not occur even after 100 times, It is the same as "2R 5th jackpot" except that the gaming state is set to the high accuracy and low base state, that is, the period during which the gaming state changes is different. Further, the "2R 5th jackpot" is set earlier than the "2R 6th jackpot" when the gaming state changes from the high-accuracy high-base state to the high-accuracy low-base state. Therefore, it can be said that the "2R 5th jackpot" is a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the "2R 6th jackpot".

In addition, the high accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game (2R 5th big hit game) related to "2R 5th big hit" and the low after the end of the big hit game (2R 7th big hit game) related to "2R 7th big hit". By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the highly accurate base state, it is possible for the player to recognize which game state the player is in. It is difficult. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the common fluctuation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy high-base state) is not notified (difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot is "2R 5th jackpot", the gaming state becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state advantageous for the player) after 50 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed, and "2R". In the case of "7th big hit", the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 50 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. Therefore, the player can play with the expectation that the game will shift to the high-accuracy and low-base state regardless of the game state in the non-notification state, which enhances the game interest.

In addition, the high accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game (2R 6th big hit game) related to "2R 6th big hit" and the low after the end of the big hit game (2R 8th big hit game) related to "2R 8th big hit". By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the highly accurate base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the common fluctuation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to a non-notification state in which the game state (high-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy high-base state) is not notified (difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot is "2R 6th jackpot", the gaming state becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state advantageous for the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has passed, and "2R". In the case of "8th big hit", the player will not be notified because the game state will be in the low probability low base state (normal state which is disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of the variation display of the special symbol has passed. Regardless of the state of the game, it is possible to play with the expectation that the state will shift to the high-accuracy and low-base state, which will enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, the high accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game (2R 5th big hit game) related to "2R 5th big hit" and the low after the end of the big hit game (2R 7th big hit game) related to "2R 7th big hit". High-accuracy base state, high-accuracy high-base state after the end of the jackpot game (2R 6th jackpot game) related to "2R 6th jackpot", and jackpot game related to "2R 8th jackpot" (2R 8th jackpot game) By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low accuracy and high base state after the end, the player recognizes which game state it is. Make it difficult. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the common fluctuation pattern determination table. As a result, these gaming states are set to non-notification states that do not notify the gaming state (high-accuracy high-base state or low-accuracy high-base state) (make it difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot is "2R 5th jackpot", the gaming state becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state advantageous for the player) after 50 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed, and "2R". In the case of "7th big hit", the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 50 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. In addition, when the type of jackpot is "2R 6th jackpot", the gaming state becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state advantageous for the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. In the case of "2R 8th big hit", the gaming state becomes a low probability low base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. Therefore, the player may play with the expectation that the special symbol will shift to the high-accuracy and low-base state when the variable display of the special symbol has passed 50 times, regardless of the gaming state in the non-notification state. It will be possible and will enhance the entertainment of the game.

In addition, even if the game does not shift to the high-accuracy low-base state, the game is expected to continue at least the high-base state (that is, the non-notification state continues) without shifting to the low-accuracy low-base state. I do. If the non-notification state continues after 50 times of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, it is expected that a big hit will occur, and when the fluctuation display of the special symbol has passed 100 times, it shifts to the high accuracy and low base state. The game will be played with the expectation that it will be played, and the interest of the game will be enhanced. In this way, in the non-notification state, the points for raising the expectation of the player are set a plurality of times, and it is possible to further enhance the game interest and maintain the high game interest for a long period of time.

In addition, as for the small hit that can occur as a result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment, the number of times the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is opened is set to two times, and one time (and) as compared with other big hits. The total opening time is also set short. Specifically, the opening is performed twice for 0.9 seconds for a total of 1.8 seconds. Therefore, as compared with the big hit game (for example, 15R 3rd big hit game, 4R 4th big hit game, etc.), the number of game balls that can be obtained in one small hit game is set to be smaller. However, by generating the small hits a plurality of times (many times), it is possible to execute the small hit games a plurality of times and acquire more game balls. In addition, in all small hits, the second big winning opening 35 is opened, and the first big winning opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second large winning opening 35 is also referred to as a "small hit large winning opening (small hit variable entry opening)". In the small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times the big winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of times it is opened. In addition, the probability variation function does not operate based on the occurrence of a small hit, and if the game state at the time of the small hit is a high probability state, it is considered to be a high probability state even after the small hit game is completed, and when the small hit occurs If the game state is a low-probability state, it is considered to be a low-probability state even after the small hit game is completed. Similarly, the time saving function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not activated based on the occurrence of small hits.

In this embodiment, the distribution probability to each jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 65% for the 4R first jackpot and 35% for the 4R second jackpot. On the other hand, the jackpots in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are 15R third jackpot 50%, 4R fourth jackpot 5%, 2R fifth jackpot 5%, and 2R sixth jackpot. 5%, 2R 7th jackpot is 25%, 2R 8th jackpot is 10%. That is, when a big hit is obtained by the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol hit / fail judgment) based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 in which the ball entry frequency is improved by the operation of the second special symbol time saving function described later. It becomes a 15R jackpot (15R third jackpot), and a large number of game balls can be acquired in a short period of time. In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game is played in the second starting port 21 rather than being a big hit in the winning / failing determination (first special symbol winning / failing determination) performed when the game ball enters the first starting port 20. It is set so that a big hit in the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol hit / fail judgment) performed when the ball enters is more likely to be advantageous to the player (a large number of game balls can be acquired). There is. In addition, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the third big hit of 15R and the occurrence of a high-accuracy low-base state in which the number of game balls can be increased by the small hit.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is performed based on a "random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct" (also referred to as "information for determining whether or not it is successful"), and when it becomes a big hit. The determination of the jackpot type is performed based on the "random number for determining the jackpot type" (also referred to as "random number for determining symbol" or "information for determining symbol"). As shown in FIG. 7A, the random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random numbers (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 include a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, a random number for determining the jackpot type, and a "variation pattern". There is a "random number" (also called "variation pattern information"). Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation mode) including the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage of the gate 28 include the random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct as shown in FIG. 7 (B). The normal symbol hit / miss determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol hit / miss determination). Ordinary symbol random numbers take a value in the range of 0 to 240.

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, each function of the probability variation function (probability variation function) for the special symbol and the normal symbol, the variation time shortening function for the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and the opening extension function of the second starting port is in the operating state or not. It has a plurality of gaming states depending on the combination of operating states. For special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the probability fluctuation function is activated is referred to as a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not activated is referred to as a "low probability state". In the high probability state (big hit probability: 1/315), the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the low probability state (big hit probability: 1/63). That is, in the low-probability state, the hit / fail judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table for the low-probability state, but in the high-probability state, the jackpot judgment for the high-probability state in which the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number judged to be a big hit is large. A hit / fail judgment is made using the table (see FIG. 8 (A)). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit (the stop symbol will be the jackpot symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. The means (main control unit) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (big hit probability) is referred to as a "probability setting means".

Further, for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is operating is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the special symbol is not operating is referred to as a "non-time saving state". In the time saving state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the confirmation display time) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table defined so that the fluctuation pattern having the short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and effective entry into the starting port (entry ball that can be stored as special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the length of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantages and disadvantages of the player, it is set as the "second special symbol time saving function" as shown in FIG. There is. When the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, that is, in the state A shown in FIG. 9, when the player performs a right-handed game and inserts the game ball into the second starting port 21, the second special symbol is used. The symbol hit / fail determination is executed, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (10 minutes off, 3 minutes for the big hit, 2 minutes for the small hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such a state). Is also referred to as "first condition state"). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large amount of game balls even if the right-handed game is performed in the state A. Therefore, in the state A, the game is advanced by the left-handed game, aiming at the first starting port 20 in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of simultaneously (parallel) executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in the variable state in the state A, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variable display of the second special symbol to end. , The first special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner.

When the second special symbol time saving function is activated, that is, in the state B or the state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as a "second condition state"), as shown in FIG. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, the player can perform the right-handed game without reducing the number of balls held as compared with the left-handed game (in state B, the state is maintained or slightly reduced, and the state is maintained or slightly reduced. In C, it is possible to smoothly execute the game (the second special symbol winning / failing determination, the second special symbol variable game) while increasing the number. Further, in this embodiment, the first special symbol time saving function is also operated during the period when the second special symbol time saving function is operating, but the first special symbol time saving function may not be operated.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function (second special symbol time reduction function) for the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) operate at the same time. Then, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol operate in synchronization with the high base generation function. That is, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) and the low base state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy). It does not work in the low base state). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the low base state (also referred to as "general figure high probability state"). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (win random number) determined to be a hit is larger than that of the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C). Using the normal symbol hit determination table, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment (judgment of the normal symbol) is performed (see FIG. 8C). That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stop symbol will be a normal hit symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. ..

Further, in the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8 (E)). Further, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. That is, in the high base state, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 operates. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the low base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 0.5 seconds three times (opening time: 1.5 seconds) to open. The second starting port is opened during the operation period. Further, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the high base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 is assumed to perform the opening operation of 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). .. Further, the closing time between the opening operations in the low base state is set to 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening / closing member 37 is different between the low base state and the high base state, but the number of opening operations may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be set to open once for 1.0 second, or the opening operation in the high base state may be set to open three times for 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be set to 6 times of 1.0 seconds, which may be larger than the number of times of opening in the low base state. Such a case is also referred to as an operation of increasing the number of times the variable winning device 22 is opened.

In the high base state, the probability fluctuation function for the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, as compared with the low base state in which these functions are not activated. , The period during which the second starting port 21 is open becomes longer (the opening time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 becomes higher (also referred to as "high frequency state"). .). As a result, the execution frequency of the second special symbol winning / failing determination becomes high. As described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls on hand.

Further, if the opening time is the same, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball passes through the second starting port 21 when the number of times of opening is small. In this embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to open once for 6.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is in the closed state during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the game ball starts to flow down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state during the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. The time is set so that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is in the open state while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the open state. Further, in order to prevent the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing over the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is used for the game on the front side thereof. The material has a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the material is different). As a result, the flow-down speed of the game ball on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to be slower than the flow-down speed of the game ball in the game ball passage on the front side thereof. Further, as a mode for reducing the flow-down speed, the inclination angle may be loosened, or an obstructive member (projection or the like) for reducing the flow-down speed may be provided. Further, as a result, in the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning opening. The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if a small hit occurs and the second large winning opening 35 is in the open state (the ball can be entered), the game ball that has flowed down enters the second starting opening 21 and is second. It is difficult to enter the big winning opening 35.

The high base state does not have to activate all of the above functions. That is, by operating at least one of the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol, the second starting port is more than when the function is not operating. It suffices if 21 is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state is called a "high base generation function".

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol, so that the player changes the first special symbol. There is a possibility of trying to change the display of the second special symbol without displaying it. That is, there is a possibility of trying to perform a right-handed game even in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state). However, as described above, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol. Since it is set to, even if the second special symbol is variablely displayed in the normal state, it cannot be variablely displayed many times, and the game efficiency is very poor. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to display the first special symbol in a variable manner by the left-handed game than to display the second special symbol in a variable manner by the right-handed game. Here, "a state in which the first special symbol is not in the game (non-gaming state)" means that the first special symbol is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved first special symbols is "0". It means that it is. In addition, "a state in which the second special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)" means that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved second special symbols is "0". It means that.

Further, in the high base state such as the high accuracy high base state and the low accuracy high base state, and in the high accuracy low base state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened by the second special symbol time saving function, and the right-handed game is performed. The game efficiency is improved. In such a case, it is possible to proceed with the game more advantageously by performing the right-handed game and performing the second special symbol winning / failing determination which is advantageous for the player. In the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second starting port 21 than to enter the first starting port 20. Because it is. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which normally triggers the determination of whether or not the symbol is correct, a right-handed hit is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21.

Further, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 is the same as in the low-accuracy low-base state (normal state), but the ball is executed based on the entry into the third starting port 26. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, a right-handed game is performed in which the second special symbol winning / failing determination, which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol winning / failing determination, can be executed. Here, in the high accuracy and low base state, the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol are not activated, so that the second starting port 21 is reached. The frequency of ball entry is low compared to the high base state. Therefore, a prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 cannot be obtained as much as in the high base state. However, instead, the number of game balls decreases during the big hit due to the small hit (small hit probability: 300/630) that occurs with a high probability due to the second special symbol hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the third starting port 26. It is possible to increase the number of balls held by preventing this from happening, and rather by making small hits occur frequently (occurring multiple times).

That is, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), the ball is frequently entered into the second starting port 21 by the right-handed game, so that the second ball is not significantly reduced. Aim for the next big hit by judging whether the special symbol is correct or not. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is set to one, and even if all the game balls hit to the right enter the second starting opening 21, the game is played. The sphere does not increase (maintain). Further, in this embodiment, since about 90 to 95% of the right-handed game balls are set to enter the second starting port 21, the base is high unless the ball enters another entry port. If the state is continued for a long period of time, the number of balls held will decrease, albeit slightly.

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy and low-base state, the right-handed game causes small hits to occur frequently in the second special symbol hit / fail judgment based on the entry of the ball into the third starting port 26, and the number of balls held in the small hit game is increased. At the same time, aim for the next big hit by judging whether the second special symbol is correct or not. That is, in the high-accuracy low-base state (specific period), the frequency with which the second special symbol (identification information) is stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol (second specific mode) is the frequency of other gaming states (low-accuracy high-base state, It is higher than the high-accuracy high-base state and the low-accuracy low-base state, that is, the non-specific period), and the execution frequency of the small hit game increases accordingly. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the high-accuracy low-base state, the longer the period in which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the period in the high-accuracy low-base state continues), the more small hits are generated. There are more opportunities (to perform small hit games), which is advantageous for the player. In this way, the high-accuracy low-base state in which it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls held by the small hit game by making small hits occur frequently is the so-called "small hit rush" game state. The gaming state is also referred to as a "specific gaming state".

[Explanation of board configuration and game status]
As shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), the gate 28 (start gate 29), the first large winning opening 30, the second starting opening 21, and the second second from the upstream side of the game area. Various entrances are arranged in the order of the winning openings 35 in the optimum order. Further, since the game ball flow passage in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, most of the game balls fired in the right game area 3B (90%) when each of these winning openings is closed. The above) passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flows down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first winning opening 30, then flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21, and then flows down the second second. The structure is such that the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 of the winning opening 35 flows down and flows down to the out opening 34. Then, if there is an open winning opening in the middle of the flow, the ball enters the winning opening, is discharged from the winning opening to the back surface of the game board, and the entered game ball is placed in the game area downstream of the winning opening. It has a structure that is not available.

In the present embodiment, by arranging the gate 28 in the uppermost stream, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is hindered from reaching the gate 28 by the opened second starting port 21 or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent as much as possible that the normal symbol hold becomes "0" and a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbol does not change) occurs. That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream of the right game area, almost all the game balls hit right can be passed through the gate 28 regardless of whether or not the other winning openings are open. Further, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows down the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not hinder the ball from entering another winning opening.

When a right-handed game is performed in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), it is first determined whether or not the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened. Will be executed. In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is also set to a high probability (239/240), so that the game ball is gated. Immediately after passing through 28 (1 second later), the movable member 23 is opened and the second starting port 21 is opened. That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol hit / fail determination is executed and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second starting port 21. 2 The starting port 21 is in the open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also set to be one time of 6.0 seconds, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second as long as the right-handed game is continued. After that, the cycle of opening once for 6.0 seconds, closing during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then opening once for 6.0 seconds is repeated (1 second closing → 6). Open for 0.0 seconds → Close for 1 second → Open for about 6.0 seconds → ...).

Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is almost opened, and most of the game balls (about 80 to 90%) flowing down the right game area 3B are in the second starting port 21. It will enter the ball. When the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the second special symbol hit / miss determination is executed. In the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, in the high accuracy and high base state, there is a 1/63 probability of a big hit, a 30/63 probability of a small hit, and a 32/63 probability of a loss.

When the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is wrong in the high base state, most of the game balls (about 80 to 90%) of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B are opened after passing through the gate 28. The ball enters the second starting port 21 in the state, and the other game balls are guided to the upper game ball passage of the game ball passages that branch in front of the second starting port 21 and enter the third starting port 26. Ball or flow into the out port 34. As a result, the second special symbol hit / miss determination is continuously executed. In addition, since one prize ball is ejected by entering one ball into the second starting port 21, it is possible to execute the second special symbol hit / fail judgment with almost no reduction in the number of balls held and aim for the next big hit. It will be possible. In addition, one prize ball is also ejected by entering one ball into the third starting port 26.

Further, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is a big hit in the high base state, the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 opens in a manner corresponding to the big hit type shown in FIG. It becomes a state. Further, the second big winning opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the big hit game. As a result, when the big hit game is started, the game ball that flows down by the right-handed game is smoothly entered by the first big winning opening 30 without being hindered by other winning openings such as the second starting opening 21. Enter the ball.

Here, when the second starting port 21 is arranged upstream from the first big winning opening 30, the second starting port 21 shifts to the low base state during the big hit game, but in this embodiment, the second starting port 21 is placed even in the low base state. Since the specifications are such that the ball is frequently opened, the game ball flowing down the right game area during the big hit game enters the second start port 21 first and does not enter the second start port 21. A situation occurs in which only the game ball enters the first large winning opening 30. Moreover, since the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is one, the execution time of the jackpot game is only extended for a long time, and the player has no merit. Rather, the game becomes redundant and does not proceed smoothly, which may reduce the interest of the game. In this regard, by arranging the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21 as in this embodiment, such a situation can be prevented and the big hit game can proceed smoothly. .. Since the first big winning opening 30 is not opened except during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 30 does not prevent the ball from entering the second starting opening 21 at the time other than the big hit game. ..

Further, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is a small hit in the high base state, the second large winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 has the opening / closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. It becomes an open state. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.9 seconds is executed twice (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 second). However, as described above, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is in the open state for most of the time. Therefore, about 99% (almost all) of the game balls flowing down to the second start port 21 enter the second start port 21 arranged on the upstream side of the second large winning opening 35. Therefore, in the high base state, even if a small hit game is executed in which the second large winning opening 35 is opened as a small hit, the second large opening 21 on the upstream side causes the second large on the downstream side. The entry into the winning opening 35 is hindered, and it is difficult to enter the second major winning opening 35. Although the number is small (although unlikely), even in the high base state, when the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, the game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 When the second big winning opening 35 is reached, if the second big winning opening 35 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second big winning opening 35.

Next, the high accuracy and low base state will be described. The high-accuracy low-base state is a low-base state, but since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting right. When the right-handed game is performed in the high-accuracy and low-base state, the game ball first passes through the gate 28, and a determination as to whether or not the second starting port 21 is opened (normal symbol hit / fail determination) is executed. In the low base state (high accuracy low base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be longer (3 seconds) than in the high base state, and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is about half that of the high base state (120). Since it is set to / 240), if the game ball hits after a short time (3 seconds later) after passing through the gate, the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 is opened. Become. Since the probability of winning is about 1/2, hits and misses occur in about half and half.

That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol hit / fail determination is executed and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the second game ball that has passed through the gate passes through the entrance of the second starting port 21. The starting port 21 is in the open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is set to 0.5 seconds three times (the closing time between openings is 0.1 seconds), the second starting port 21 will open as long as the right-handed game is continued. It closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and when it hits, it opens 3 times for 0.5 seconds, and when it comes off, it becomes the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds again. Looking at an example in which hits and misses occur alternately, the second start port 21 closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, then opens 3 times for 0.5 seconds, and then the normal symbol for 3 seconds. It closes during the fluctuation time, becomes out, and closes during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 3 seconds, and repeats the cycle (3 seconds closed → about 1.5 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → about. 1.5 seconds open → 3 seconds closed → 3 seconds closed → about 1.5 seconds open → ...).

Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the high-accuracy and low-base state, the period in which the second start port 21 is in the open state is about 20%, and the period in which the second start port 21 is in the closed state is about 80%. .. Therefore, the high-accuracy low-base state is the second, as compared with the high-base state in which the second start port 21 is in the open state for about 90% and the second start port 21 is in the closed state for about 10%. There is a high possibility that the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the starting port 21 will pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23 and reach the entrance of the second winning opening 35 without entering the second starting opening 21. There is. The possibility that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment will be a small hit does not change regardless of whether it is in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) or in the high accuracy low base state. .. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 300/630). In addition, no small hit is provided in the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment executed in the left-handed game, and only the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment executed in the right-handed game has a small hit. It is provided.

As described above, in the high accuracy and low base state, about 80% of the game balls that flow down the right game area (flow down to the second start port 21) enter the second start port 21. Instead, it flows down to the second big winning opening 35 provided downstream of the second starting opening 21. When the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is a small hit, the second large winning opening 35 is opened in the opening / closing mode for the small hit shown in FIG. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.9 seconds is executed twice (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds, and the total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first winning opening 30 and flows down to the second starting opening 21, and if the second starting opening 21 is in the open state, the first 2 The ball enters the starting port 21, and if the second starting port 21 is in the closed state, it passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 and flows down to the second big winning opening 35, and a small hit game. The ball is entered into the second large winning opening 35, which has been opened by.

Since the prize balls based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each entry, the balls are entered into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls held during the high accuracy and low base state. In addition, the high-accuracy low-base state continues until at least the next big hit occurs due to the special symbol winning / failing determination (only the second special symbol winning / failing determination is executed as long as the right-handed game is continued). The longer the game continues, the more the player can increase the number of balls he has. In this embodiment, about 30 prize balls (3 balls entered) can be obtained on average by the occurrence of one small hit game. By generating this small hit game multiple times (many times) until the next big hit occurs, a large number of game balls (prize balls) can be obtained (for example, 300 pieces in 10 times, 20 times in 20 times). (Acquisition of 600 pieces) is also possible. Then, as the total winning balls for the "renso period" in which the right-handed game is continued, the winning balls for the small hit game can be added in addition to the winning balls for the big hit game, and a larger number of game balls can be obtained. This makes it possible to enhance the interest in the game.

The gate 28, the first big winning opening 30 for big hits (for big hits only), and the second big winning opening 35 arranged downstream from the second starting opening 21 (the most downstream of these) are for small hits (small hits). It is said to be a big prize opening for exclusive use. By arranging the second big winning opening 35, which is the big winning opening for small hits, downstream from the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening / closing control) of the second starting opening 21 causes the second big winning opening. The number (ratio) of game balls reaching the mouth 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed by the opening / closing control of the second starting port 21 (time of opening state, fluctuation time of normal symbol, winning probability of normal symbol winning / failing determination), a high base state ( The high-probability low-base state is more likely than the low-probability high-base state and the high-probability high-base state) to allow the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 35. Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second big winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting opening 21 (without entering the ball), the second one is formed. The effect of opening / closing control of the starting port 21 is made more effective.

In this pachinko gaming machine 1, even in the same right-handed game, a gaming ball is inserted into the second starting port 21 to substantially maintain the holding ball (including a slight increase or a slight decrease) (or a decrease in the holding ball). (While suppressing the speed), a state in which the game is played with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment will be a big hit (advantageous big hit) (high base state), and a game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21. When a small hit occurs, the ball is entered into the second big winning opening 35 to increase the number of balls held, while playing with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment will be a big hit (advantageous big hit). High accuracy and low base state), and diversify the playability. This makes it possible to enhance the interest in the game. For the player, the high-accuracy low-base state in which the number of balls held can be increased is more advantageous than the high-base state.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, the game state after the big hit game is set to the high accuracy high base state, and the predetermined number of times (50 or 100) in the high accuracy high base state. If the jackpot is not reached until the variation display of the special symbol in) is completed, the game state is changed to the high accuracy and low base state. Further, when the game state after the big hit game is set to the high base state, it is difficult to recognize whether the high base state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state on the effect symbol display unit or the like. The game effect is executed in the mode. As a result, even if the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is not the high-accuracy low-base state but the high-accuracy low-base state, it is expected that the game state will change to the high-accuracy low-base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations. It becomes possible to play a game. This makes it possible to maintain the game entertainment interest for a long period of time.

Further, in this embodiment, there are "2R 5th jackpot" and "2R 6th jackpot" as the types of jackpots that shift from the high-accuracy high-base state to the high-accuracy low-base state. The "2R 5th jackpot" shifts from the high-accuracy high-base state to the high-accuracy low-base state after 50 times of special symbol fluctuation display, and the "2R 6th jackpot" shifts to the 100-time special symbol variation display. After that, the state shifts from the high-accuracy high-base state to the high-accuracy low-base state. In addition, it has "2R 7th jackpot" and "2R 8th jackpot" as high accuracy and low base states. The "2R 7th jackpot" shifts from the low accuracy high base state to the low accuracy low base state (normal state) after 50 times of special symbol fluctuation display, and the "2R 8th jackpot" is 100 times special. After the fluctuation display of the symbol has passed, the state shifts from the low accuracy high base state to the low accuracy low base state (normal state). In this embodiment, the high hit game and the high after the big hit game are related to the four big hit types of "2R 5th big hit", "2R 6th big hit", "2R 7th big hit" and "2R 8th big hit". By executing the common effect in the base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state the player is in. That is, it is in a non-notification state in which the game state is not notified.

In this embodiment, the distribution rate (occurrence rate) of "2R 5th jackpot", "2R 6th jackpot", "2R 7th jackpot", and "2R 8th jackpot" that trigger the occurrence of the non-notification state is used. If the high base state (non-notification state) continues even after 50 times, it is more likely than when the high base state ends after 50 times, and the high accuracy and low base state after 100 times. It is supposed to move to. Therefore, the player expects to shift to the high-accuracy low-base state after 50 times, and the high-base state continues without shifting to the high-accuracy low-base state even after 50 times (). Even if the non-notification state continues), it is possible to further increase the expectation for the high accuracy and low base state. This makes it possible to maintain the game entertainment interest for a long period of time.

In addition, even if the possibility of shifting to the high-accuracy low-base state is set to be the same regardless of whether the transition is made after 50 times or 100 times, by changing to such a mode. On the contrary, the case of shifting after 50 times may be more likely to shift to the high-accuracy and low-base state than the case of shifting after 100 times. As a result, if the high base state continues even after 50 times, the expectation for the transition to the high accuracy and low base state is lowered. Further, if another jackpot type is provided and the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays has passed, after the second predetermined number of times, which is larger than the first predetermined number of times, has elapsed ( You may decide to move to a high-accuracy, low-base state (if you don't get a big hit by then). On the contrary, if the high base state continues even after the first predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations are displayed, after the second predetermined number of times, which is larger than the first predetermined number of times, has elapsed (if it is a big hit by then). If not), it may be confirmed that the transition to the high-accuracy low-base state does not occur. In addition, when a predetermined condition (random number lottery, etc.) is satisfied in the middle of the non-notification state in the high base state, the game is displayed by displaying characters and characters that make it easy for the player to recognize the game state (performing a definite effect). The status may be notified.

In the case where the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit in the high accuracy low base state and the case where the result is a big hit, the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit in the above-mentioned high base state. It is the same as the case and the case where it comes off.

The start gate 29 is also used as the gate 28 and is provided at the uppermost stream in the right game area 3B. As a result, when the jackpot standby state is reached, the game ball is passed through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing without being hindered by the second start port 21 or the like, and the jackpot game is started. It becomes possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In that case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but the first large winning opening 30 and the second gate 28 may be provided. It is necessary to provide it upstream from the starting port 21 and the second large winning opening 35.

Next, the launch direction indicator 47 shown in FIG. 4 is controlled to light in a predetermined manner when the right-handed game is to be performed, and notifies that the right-handed game should be fired. Further, the launch direction indicator 47 is lit (display controlled) in a predetermined mode when the left-handed game should be performed, and notifies that the left-handed game should be launched. Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the launch direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the left game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "y □ z □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y ■ z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). can.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming states when the variation display of the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is performed are "low accuracy low base state", "high accuracy low base state", and "high accuracy low base state". It is possible to control either "low accuracy high base state" or "high accuracy high base state", but among them, the low accuracy low base state is also called "normal gaming state", and the high accuracy low base state is called. Also called "specific gaming state".

[Main control main processing]
Next, the main operation (control processing by the main control unit) of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 46. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80. .. As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, the initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial settings, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, statuses, and counters. Reset etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". In addition, the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are disabled (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, the interrupt is enabled (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, between the end of the interrupt process (S105) and the start of the next interrupt process (S105), the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Will be executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt processing (S105), the output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like. do. Examples of the command and the like output here include information on the game state, the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, the symbol as the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information about the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information about the content of the command.

In the input process (S202) performed after the output process (S201), various sensors (first start port sensor 20a, second start port sensor 21a, first large winning port sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. The detection signal detected by 30a, the second major winning opening sensor 35a, the general entry opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) is read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as entry information and prize ball information. Further, the detection signal from the lower plate full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball tray 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as the lower plate full data.

Here, the ball entry information is data indicating that the ball has entered the start port, the winning port, or the like corresponding to the sensor that detected the game ball. For example, the starting ball entry command or the first major winning opening entry The ball command, the second big winning opening ball command, and the general entering ball command are applicable. These ball entry commands are transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201) and are used for controlling various effect devices and the like. Further, the prize ball information is data for instructing the payout control board 110 to pay out a number of prize balls determined according to various winning openings (sensors), and corresponds to, for example, a prize ball payout command. Specifically, for example, when a game ball enters the first prize opening 30 and is detected by the first prize opening sensor 30a in a big hit game, a prize ball payout command instructing the payment of 15 prize balls is issued. It is stored as prize ball information, and when a game ball enters the second big prize opening 35 and is detected by the second big winning opening sensor 35a in a small hit game, the prize ball payout instructing the payout of 10 prize balls. The command is stored as prize ball information. These prize ball payout commands are transmitted to the payout control board 110 by the output process (S201) and are used to control the payout device 120 (payout motor 121).

Next, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is executed. The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is performed after the execution period of the timer interrupt processing (S105) and the other periods (after the end of the interrupt processing (S105)). It is performed both in the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started). As a result, the acquired values of various random numbers are given randomness.

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start port sensor detection process (S204), start ball entry process (S205), normal figure operation process (S206), and special figure 1 operation process (S207), which will be described later. ), Special figure 2 operation process (S208), hold ball number process (S209), and power failure monitoring process (S210) are executed. After that, various other processes (S211) are executed to end the interrupt process (S105). Then, until the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the main control main processes S102 to S104 are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
As shown in FIG. 12, in the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). .. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal symbol hold balls (the number of normal symbol hold, specifically, the number of normal symbol hold provided in the RAM) is counted by the counter. It is determined whether or not the value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined in S301 that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If it is determined in S302 that the number of normally symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the stored normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. Do and proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7 (B)) of the random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct or not stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number values (acquisition information, normal figure acquisition information) are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol hold balls in the normal figure hold storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port 20, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting port sensor 20a (S305). As a result, when it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of first special figure reserved, specifically, the RAM of the main control unit 80) It is determined whether or not the number (numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the first special figure pending) provided has reached 4 (upper limit number) (S306). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. When it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the stored special figure 1 reserved balls (S307), and the special figure 1 related random number is acquired. Process (S308) and proceed to S309.

In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, and the random number for determining the jackpot type, which are stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (random number values shown in FIG. 7 (A)), and the acquired random number values (acquisition information, special feature) are acquired. The figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in the first special figure hold storage unit 85a.

In S309, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 21a (S309). When it is determined in S309 that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 21 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of second special figure reserved, specifically the main control). It is determined whether or not the number (numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the second special figure hold) provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). Then, when it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached four (YES in S310), the process ends. When it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the stored number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 (S311), and it is related to Special Figure 2. Random number acquisition processing is performed (S312), and the processing is completed.

In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), the value of the special symbol hit / miss determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is the same as in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308). (Label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7A). Random number value), and those acquired random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the second special figure 2 in the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

[Processing at the time of starting ball entry]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a start ball entry process (S205) following the start port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start-in / entering ball processing (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by “1” (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 in S307 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start port. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure hold storage unit is read (acquired information). S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the acquired random number values read out, the value of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not) is a big hit according to the current game state (low probability state or high probability state). It is determined whether or not it is out of order (preliminary determination), and if the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of the big hit is further determined (preliminary determination). The determination (pre-judgment) by S317 is a pre-judgment (so-called "hold look-ahead") in which the hit / fail judgment (judgment of whether or not it is a big hit) for the special figure 2 hold is performed prior to the hit / fail judgment in the special figure 2 hit / fail judgment process described later. ").

The pre-judgment as to whether or not it is a big hit can be made in the big hit judgment table (see FIG. 8A), that is, in the high probability state, the big hit judgment table for the high probability state, or in the normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the value matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. Further, as another pre-judgment mode, as a fluctuation pattern information judgment table capable of judging fluctuation pattern information, a fluctuation pattern information judgment table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a fluctuation pattern information judgment table for a high probability state (for a high probability state) It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern information determination table of the above is provided. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the acquired random number value (value of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to do. Then, from the selected fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and whether or not a game effect with high reliability of the big hit is executed.

Next, in S318, game information (preliminary judgment information) related to the result of the judgment by S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches the jackpot judgment value (big hit information), Information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random value for determining the jackpot type) (big hit type information), information indicating whether or not the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches the small hit determination value (small hit information) ), Command data including information indicating the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) is generated as a special figure 2 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). In addition, as a special figure 2 start entry command, a part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read by S316 may be transmitted to the sub-control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted as it is. Is not transmitted as it is, but the game information acquired based on the value of the random number acquired in Special Figure 2 (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information) may be transmitted.

Further, by analyzing the special figure 2 start-in ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, it is the information related to the big hit, the type of the big hit, and the information related to the small hit. The sub-control unit 90 can identify the command. Further, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entry command, whether or not the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when it is judged in a high probability state, and low. It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when it is judged in the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start entry command as a hold (effect hold information), predetermines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not the command is successful in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect hold information determined to be a big hit is stored in.

From the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not among the random number values read by S316 is not transmitted to the sub-control unit as it is, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other jackpot type (big hit). Command data including information indicating the value of the random number value for determining the type) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) and the information indicating the result of the pre-judgment are generated as the special figure 2 start entry command, and this is generated. Can be set.

Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" in the same manner as in the above-described processing according to Special Figure 2 (S319). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends as it is. The processing of S321 to S323 is the same processing as that of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure hold storage unit is read (S321). Pre-determination is performed on the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, the command data including the game information related to this pre-determination is generated as the special figure 1 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). The preliminary determination (holding look-ahead) of S322 is performed prior to the accuracy determination in the special figure 1 accuracy determination process described later.

[Public map operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal drawing operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 after the start ball entry process (S205). In the normal figure operation process (S206), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. .. Then, when the "normal figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "2" (S401). NO, YES for S403), normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404) is performed, and if the "normal symbol operation status" is "3" (NO for both S401 and S403, YES for S405), the normal symbol is confirmed. The process (S406) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), the normal electric accessory process (S407) is performed. The normal figure operation status is "1" by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and when it is determined in S501 that it is "0". (YES in S501), finish the process. On the other hand, when it is determined in S501 that it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol hit / fail determination process described later is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the game state is the high base state (state B), the normal symbol variation time is 1 second. Select a symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a low base state (states A and C), a normal symbol variation pattern with a normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Further, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504) described later is performed, then the normal symbol variation start process (S505) is performed, and the process is completed. In the normal symbol fluctuation start processing (S505), the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started with the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of change of the normal symbol.

[Normal symbol hit / fail judgment process]
As shown in FIG. 16, in the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit / miss determination random number counter stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) (S602). When it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, it is in a high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B (hit determination) among the normal symbol hit determination tables shown in FIG. 8 (C). Based on the high-probability normal-figure hit / fail judgment based on the values "0" to "238"), it is judged whether or not the hit is true (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values.

On the other hand, in S602, when the state B flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the base state is low (NO in S602), the state A (state C) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C). It is determined whether or not it is a hit by the low-probability normal figure hit / fail judgment based on the table (hit judgment value is "0" to "119") (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / fail judgment (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and if it is judged to be wrong (NO in S605), the stop display is lost. Determine the normal symbol (the symbol that is out of the ordinary) (S606), and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal figure) in S605 (YES in S605), the normal symbol per stop display (design per normal figure) is determined (S607), and the normal figure hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), Finish the process.

[Ordinary symbol random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each Fuzu hold in the Fuzu hold storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest hold storage in the normal figure hold storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth hold of the normal figure is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this way, the general map hold is digested in the order of hold.

[Processing during normal symbol change]
As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and when it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S801), the processing is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803), and then the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed. Other processing such as stopping at the display result (hit normal symbol or off normal symbol) according to the judgment result of the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not is performed (S804), and the process is completed.

[Normal symbol confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). When it is determined that the normal figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal figure hit flag is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high base state (S902). When it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), the opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), shift to S904. The opening pattern for the state B (for the high base state) is, as described above, an opening pattern in which the opening for 6.0 seconds is performed once. Therefore, "1" is set in the second start port opening counter that counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the open patterns for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) are open for states A and C (for low base states). Set the pattern (S906) and move to S904. The opening pattern for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 0.5 seconds is performed three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second start port opening counter. In S904, the normal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is completed.

[Ordinary electric accessory processing]
As shown in FIG. 20, in the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal figure is ON (S1001). The hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has been completed in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. When it is determined that the end flag per normal figure is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is being opened (S1002). When it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port is not open (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second starting port 21 (S1003), and the opening time has not been reached. If it is determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second starting port (YES in S1003), the control for opening the second starting port is executed (S1004), and the process ends. If it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is time to close the second starting port 21 (that is, it is determined in advance after opening the second starting port 21). If it is determined (whether or not the opened opening time has elapsed) (S1005) and it is determined that it is not the closing time of the second starting port (NO in S1005), the process is terminated. When it is determined by S1005 that it is the closing time of the second starting port (YES in S1005), the process of closing (closing) the second starting port 21 is performed (S1006), and the value of the second starting port opening counter is set. 1 Decline (S1007) and move to the processing of S1008.

In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start port opening counter is "0" (S1008). When it is determined that the value of the open counter is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is terminated as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1008 that the value of the open counter is "0" (YES in S1008), the end processing for hitting the normal figure to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the end flag for hitting the normal figure is set (S1010). ), Finish the process. The second start port opening counter becomes "0" when the second start port 21 is opened three times (opening operation of the movable member 23) in the state B (high base state), and the state A. And even in the state C (low base state), when the second starting port 21 is opened three times, it becomes “0”.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed. , Turn off the normal figure hit end flag (S1011), turn off the normal figure hit flag (S1012), set the normal figure operation status to "1" (S1013), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (S206).

[Special Figure 1 Operation Processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 operation process (S207) after the normal figure operation process (S206). In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the big prize device (first big prize device 31 and second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the special figure 1 operation status is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the special figure 1 operation status is "2" (in S1101). NO, YES for S1103), processing during change of special symbol 1 (S1104), and if the operation status of special symbol 1 is "3" (NO for both S1101 and S1103, YES for S1105), special symbol 1 is confirmed. If the processing (S1106) is performed and the operation status of Special Figure 1 is "4" (NO for S1101, S1103, S1105, YES for S1107), special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) as a jackpot game is performed. If the operation status of Special Figure 1 is "5" (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), the process is completed. The operation status of Special Figure 1 is "1" by default. Further, since the small hit is not set as the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, the special electric accessory process 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small hit is set as the result of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. You may. In this case, when the operation status of the special figure 1 is "5", the special electric accessory process 2 as a small hit game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 1) is “0” (S1201). ). When it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0", that is, there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 (YES in S1201), then , It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in the game (S1207). Then, when it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is in the game (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is not in the game (NO in S1207), the process is in progress to set the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the standby screen (during the execution of the demo screen for waiting for customers). If it is determined whether or not (S1208) and it is determined that the standby screen is in progress (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not in progress (NO in S1208), the standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process ends.

Further, in S1201, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not "0", that is, one or more random number counter values acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 are stored (in S1201). NO), the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204), the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) are performed in this order. Here, "special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not in the game" means that special figure 2 is not in variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0". Means that. Of course, it means that the big hit game and the small hit game according to the special figure 2 are not executed either.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
As shown in FIG. 23, in the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203), first, as a determination value, the lowest region of the first special figure hold storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the first one of the first special figure hold). The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (the oldest stored) stored in the corresponding RAM area) is read out (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (S1602). When it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when one special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol does not determine whether it is a big hit, and it is a small hit or a miss. (That is, it is not judged as a big hit). Since there is no small hit as a result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, when the second special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment executed during that period is All will be off. If it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol is not executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability variation flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state (S1603). When it is determined in S1603 that the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, it is in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the jackpot determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) The hit / fail judgment is made based on the table (big hit judgment values are "3" and "397") (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S1603), the hit / fail determination is performed based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are "3", "53", "113", "173", "227", "281", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

In S1606, it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is "big hit" (S1606), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (YES in S1606), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type. (Label-TRND-AS) is read out, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8 (B) (S1608), and the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type. (S1609), turn on the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag (S1610), and finish the process. In the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is judged using the jackpot type judgment table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol, it is for the second special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table of. Further, when it is determined that the hit / fail of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is a big hit, either the 4R first big hit or the 4R second big hit is executed. In addition, when the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is determined to be a big hit, the 15R 3rd big hit, the 4R 4th big hit, the 2R 5th big hit, the 2R 6th big hit, the 2R 7th big hit and the 2R One of the eighth jackpots is executed (FIG. 8B). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is not "big hit" (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, the off-design is decided (S1607), and the processing is completed.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot fluctuation flag, the first jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the first special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) is used. The second special symbol has a second jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) is being executed, and the main control unit 80 has. A flag corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM is set. Further, as the small hit fluctuation flag, a second small hit fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the small hit (variation display in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is displayed. A flag corresponding to the small hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. Then, when the jackpot fluctuation flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the fluctuation display related to the jackpot is being displayed), in the other special symbol hit / fail determination, a process of determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed. Not performed. That is, control is not performed so that both special symbols execute the variable display related to the jackpot in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of game value is given to the player in a very short time, and to appropriately suppress gambling.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204) after the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the state A (low probability low base state) (S1701). As a result, when it is determined that the state is A (YES in S1701), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1702), and the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON. When it is determined (YES in S1702), the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referred to in the state A jackpot table (the portion corresponding to the status A and the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Select a variation pattern based on (S1703). If the fluctuation pattern is decided, the fluctuation time is also decided. Further, in this embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of fluctuation time is selected depending on the state A jackpot table.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1702 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) in special figure 1 is 1 or 2 (S1705). When it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the table for releasing the first hold number in state A (in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the corresponding part). Further, when it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holds is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second hold number removal table (FIG. The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the variation pattern table shown in 9 (the portion corresponding to the state A and the number of pending numbers 3 and 4).

As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2". Fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. In this embodiment, fluctuation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls in the special figure works, and the average fluctuation time is shortened.

If it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not state A (low accuracy low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the gaming state is state B (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state). Determine if not (S1708). As a result, when it was determined that the state was B (S1708), then it was determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag was ON (S1709), and it was determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag was ON. Case (YES in S1709), based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state B jackpot table (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 corresponding to status B and jackpot). Select the fluctuation pattern (S1710). On the other hand, when it is determined in S1709 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B deviation table (the part corresponding to the state B and deviation in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711).

Further, when it is determined in S1708 that the gaming state is not state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), that is, the gaming state is state C (high accuracy low base state) (NO in S1708). When it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1712) and it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C jackpot table (shown in FIG. 9). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the fluctuation pattern table (the portion corresponding to the state C and the jackpot) (S1710). On the other hand, when it is determined in S1712 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the state C deviation table (the part corresponding to the state C and deviation in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714).

In addition, in the state B and the state C, since the game is mainly played by the variable display of the second special symbol by the right-handed game, if the game is performed according to the game instruction (right-handed or left-handed), the first special The variable display of the symbol is rarely executed. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the states B and C is simple (there are few types and the fluctuation time is short). In the state B, if it is a big hit, it is set to the fluctuation pattern P15, and if it is out of the way, it is set to the fluctuation pattern P16. Further, in the state C, in the case of a big hit, it is set to the fluctuation pattern P23, and in the case of a deviation, it is set to the fluctuation pattern P24.

After selecting the fluctuation pattern as described above, the other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing is completed. In the other processing (S1704), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, when the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is one lower side (for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is composed of the address space corresponding to the addresses "0000" to "0003". , Address "0000" side) (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Clear the area to 0 (S1803) and finish this process. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special symbol 1 processing during change]
As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104), first, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. Whether or not it is determined (S1901). When it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the processing is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process shifts to S1903. In S1903, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process shifts to the processing of S1904.

Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1904). When it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B fluctuation counter) that counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the state B (high base state) is subtracted by 1. Then (S1905), it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906).

When it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned off (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is a low-accuracy high-base state, it shifts to a low-accuracy low-base state (normal state), and if it is a high-accuracy high-base state, it shifts to a high-accuracy low-base state (advantageous state).

In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and the variation display of the special symbol is stopped at the result according to the judgment result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment random number and the big hit type determination random number. (S1909) and finish the process.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) is performing the variable display when the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed during the variable display of the special figure 1. This is a process of temporarily suspending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 of the above and restarting the interrupted measurement when the big hit game or the small hit game is completed. As a result, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game related to one special symbol, the hit / fail determination process or the variation display related to the other special symbol is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 28, in the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON. (NO in S2901), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON, that is, whether or not the jackpot game according to special figure 2 is being executed (S2902). When it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is being executed. It is determined whether or not it is (S2909).

When it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the process ends. Then, the variable display of the special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902), or when it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), special figure 1 Turn on the interruption flag (S2903), interrupt the measurement of the fluctuation time in Special Figure 1 (S2904), and finish the process. As a result, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

Further, when it is determined in S2901 that the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is already interrupted (YES in S2901), whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON. Is determined (S2905). When it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the jackpot game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). When it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or the small hit game related to the special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned off (NO). S2907), special figure 1 The measurement of the fluctuation time is restarted (S2908), and the processing is completed. As a result, the suspended display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol (time measurement of the fluctuation time) can be resumed.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the interruption flag, the special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and the second special symbol It has a special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as “second interruption flag”) indicating that the fluctuation display is being interrupted, and corresponds to the interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. The flag is set (memorized).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the jackpot fluctuation display related to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned off (S2002), and the first Turn on the special figure 1 jackpot flag indicating the execution of the jackpot game related to the special symbol (S2003), and shift to the processing of S2004. As a result, in Special Figure 1, it can be shown that the variable display related to the big hit is finished (the big hit is confirmed) and the game shifts to the big hit game.

In S2004, the value of the round counter that counts the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening one round once, one round is from opening the winning opening to closing) is set to "4". (S2004), in order to start the jackpot game, set the jackpot opening command (S2005), set the special figure 1 operation status to "4" (S2006), and finish the process. In addition, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the variation display of the special symbol has ended. As a result, the jackpot standby state is set. In addition, when it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, that is, the fluctuation display is related to the deviation, so the special figure 1 operation status. Is set to "1" (S2007), and the process is completed.

In this embodiment, as the jackpot flag, the special figure 1 jackpot flag (also referred to as "first jackpot flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the first special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed. ) And the special figure 2 big hit flag (also referred to as "second big hit flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol is a big hit and the big hit game related to the big hit is being executed. When the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag (also referred to as a "small hit flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the second special symbol is a small hit and the small hit game related to the small hit is being executed. When the small hit game is executed, the small hit flag corresponding to the small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

Here, the round display 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the 4R first big hit is achieved, the display mode is such as "2R Δ4R ▲ 15R Δ" (for example, ▲: lighting, Δ: extinguishing).

Next, the special figure 2 operation process (S211) and the like will be described. In the special figure 2 operation process (S211), processing is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation process (S206) shown in FIGS. 21 to 29. In order to perform the above, the following will be simplified.

[Special figure 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation process (S208) after the special figure 1 operation process (S207). As shown in FIG. 30, in the special figure 2 operation process (S208), the process is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation process (S207) shown in FIG. 21. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can execute variable display in parallel by the special figure 1 operation process and the special figure 2 operation process. That is, the digestion of the 1st special symbol hold and the digestion of the 2nd special symbol hold ("Variation display of the 1st special symbol and the variation display of the 2nd special symbol", "1st special symbol hit / miss judgment and 2nd special symbol" It is said that the hit / fail judgment and ") can be executed in parallel. Further, in this embodiment, the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the second starting port (the second special symbol hit / fail judgment) is the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the first starting port (the first special symbol hit / fail judgment). ), It is more likely to be a big hit with a large profit (a large amount of profit that can be obtained) for the player (Fig. 8 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 30, similarly to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the large prize device (first large prize device 31 and second large prize device 36) is divided into five stages. It is divided and "Special Figure 2 Operation Status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the special figure 2 operation status is "1" (YES in S1151), the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed, and when the special figure 2 operation status is "2" (in S1151). NO, YES for S1153), processing during change of special symbol 2 (S1154), and if the operation status of special symbol 2 is "3" (NO for both S1151 and S1153, YES for S1155), special symbol 2 is confirmed. If processing (S1156) is performed and the operation status of Special Figure 2 is "4" (NO for S1151, S1153, S1155, YES for S1157), special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108) as a jackpot game is performed. If the operation status of Special Figure 2 is "5" (all of S1151, S1153, S1155, and S1157 are NO), special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) as a small hit game is performed. The operation status of Special Figure 2 is "1" by default. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) which is not included in the special figure 1 operation process.

Here, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) is a process common to the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211), and the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) is Special figure 2 Only the operation process (S211) is processed. This is because the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel, but the jackpot game and the second special symbol related to the first special symbol can be executed in parallel. This is because it is impossible to execute (only one of them can be executed) in parallel with the jackpot game related to the special symbol. In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit, but as another embodiment, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 31, the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

[Special Figure 2 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
As shown in FIG. 32, the special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1253) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. 23. However, since this process is related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowest area of the second special figure hold storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) is set. The stored random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is read out. Further, since the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination has a small hit, when it is determined that the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is not a big hit (S1304), then S1305 determines the second special symbol winning / failing. Determine if the result is a small hit (S1305). When it is determined in S1305 that it is a small hit (YES in S1305), the small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is completed. Other processing is the same as that of the special figure 1 hit / fail judgment processing (S1203).

It should be noted that the small hit probability (300/630 = 1 / 2.1) in which the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit, that is, the second special symbol (identification information) can be stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol. The sex is a big hit probability (low probability: 1/315, high probability: 1/63) in which the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit in both the low probability state and the high probability state, that is, the special symbol (identification information). Is more likely to be stopped and displayed with a jackpot symbol.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), processing (S1401 to S1420) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. 24 and 25. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since this process is related to the second special symbol, it is based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the column corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. And select the fluctuation pattern. Further, since the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination has a small hit, when it is determined that the small hit fluctuation flag is ON, the fluctuation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the game state.

In the states B and C, the game is mainly performed by displaying the variation of the second special symbol (determining whether the second special symbol is correct or not). Therefore, in the states B and C, the second special symbol has more types of selectable (selectable) variation patterns (variation time) than the first special symbol (see FIG. 9). Further, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the states B and C is set to be shorter than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the state A (see FIG. 9). On the other hand, in the state A, the game is mainly performed by displaying the variation of the first special symbol (determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct). Therefore, in the state A, the first special symbol has more types of selectable (selectable) fluctuation patterns (variation time) than the second special symbol (see FIG. 9). Further, in the state A, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is made to be significantly longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (see FIG. 9). This is because a small hit is provided only in the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination, and the small hit does not occur frequently in the state A. That is, contrary to the original playability of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is for preventing right-handed hitting in the state A in which the game should be advanced by left-handed hitting.

In the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, another process (S1404) is performed to finish this process. In the other processing (S1404), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted to the lower side by one (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Clear the area to 0 (S1503) and finish this process. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2", the special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. do.

[Special symbol 2 processing during change]
As shown in FIG. 36, in the special symbol 2 changing process (S1154), the processing (S1951 to S1959) is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. 27. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIG. 37, in the special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing (S1952), the processing (S2951 to S2959) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902) shown in FIG. 28. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the special symbol 2 finalization process (S1156), the processing (S2051 to S2069) is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 finalization process (S1106) shown in FIG. 29. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special figure 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) includes a big hit type (round counter setting process) and a special symbol 2 small hit fluctuation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON (YES in S2602) is different, as shown in FIG. 38.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 39, in the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108), first, the jackpot game start process (S2101), which will be described later, is executed (S2101), and the process proceeds to the process of S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2102), and when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is ON (YES in S2102), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the jackpot start flag is a flag that is turned ON when the player fires the game ball into the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball through the start gate 29 in the jackpot standby state. .. After the special symbol is displayed as a fixed stop with the jackpot symbol and becomes a jackpot, the jackpot start flag is turned on by passing the game ball through the start gate, and the jackpot game proceeds (the round game starts). Here, when the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29 after the big hit, the game machine 1 is maintained in the big hit standby state in which the big hit can be executed. During this time, the player can leave his seat and take a break such as a toilet, a drink, or a telephone. Then, after the break is completed, the game ball is launched at an arbitrary timing of the player, and the game ball is passed through the start gate 29, so that the big hit game can proceed. Further, the jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the jackpot winning device (first jackpot winning device 31) has been completed (the jackpot game has ended) in the jackpot game.

When it is determined in S2103 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and it is not open. If it is determined (NO in S2104), it is time to open the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) (round start time), that is, the first round is started by passing through the start gate 29. It is determined whether the time has been reached, or whether the interval time between rounds (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed and the time has come to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If S2105 determines that it is not the start time of the round (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is time to start the round (YES in S2105), the round start command is set (S2106), the large winning opening processing is performed (S2107), and the processing is completed. As a result, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) according to the type of big hit.

When it is determined in S2104 that the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is open (YES in S2104), the maximum number of balls entered in the big winning opening in that round is the specified maximum number of balls (this embodiment). Then, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not it is time to close the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30), that is, the big winning opening It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening time (S2112). If it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is judged that the specified number of balls (10) has been reached in S2111 (YES in S2111), or when it is judged in S2112 that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2112). That is, when it is determined that any of the two round end conditions is satisfied, the large winning opening (first large winning opening 30) is closed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends in order to start the next round.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), the jackpot ending command is set (S2116) as the jackpot end process to end the jackpot game, and the jackpot ending period is started. Then (S2117), turn on the jackpot end flag (S2118), and finish the process. If it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2103), the final round has ended, and then it is determined whether or not the jackpot ending period has passed (S2119).

If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending period has passed in S2119 (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2120), the game state setting process (S2121) described later is performed, and the jackpot flag is turned off (S2122). The jackpot start flag is turned off (S2123), the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124) described later is performed, and the process is completed. The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the above special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) functions as a “first special game execution means”.

[Big hit game start processing]
As shown in FIG. 40, in the jackpot game start process (S2101), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2151), and the jackpot start flag is not ON, that is, the game ball is still in the jackpot standby state. When it is determined that has not passed through the start gate 29 (NO in S2151), it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S2152), and when it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2152). , The probability change flag is turned off (S2153), and the process proceeds to S2154.

In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2154), and when it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in S2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2155) and the process proceeds to S2156. That is, during the execution of the big hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned off before the start of the big hit game (round game) in order to control the low probability state and the low base state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2152 that the probability change flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning off the probability change flag. If it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning off the state B flag.

In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the start gate 29 (S2156), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed the start gate 29 (YES in S2156), the jackpot game is started (round game is opened). Turn on the jackpot start flag (S2157) to finish the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the start gate 29 (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the gaming machine 1 is maintained in the jackpot standby state. Further, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is ON in S2151, that is, the jackpot game has already started (YES in S2151), the process ends. As a result, the player can start (advance) the jackpot game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game status setting process]
As shown in FIG. 41, in the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game completed this time is related to the probability variation jackpot (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, 5 types of 4R 1st jackpot, 15R 3rd jackpot, 4R 4th jackpot, 2R 5th jackpot, and 2R 6th jackpot are set as probabilistic jackpots. Determines whether or not falls under any of these five types. Then, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot has ended this time (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), and then it is determined whether or not the completed jackpot game is the 2R 5th jackpot (S2201). S2203). As a result, when it is determined that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 5th jackpot (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), the state B counter is set to "50" (S2205), and the process is performed. Finish. As a result, a high base state of up to 50 times is set after the big hit game is completed, and the game state becomes a high accuracy high base state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2203 that the finished jackpot game is not the 2R 5th jackpot (NO in S2203), then it is determined whether or not the finished jackpot game is the 2R 6th jackpot (S2209). If it is determined in S2209 that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 6th jackpot (YES in S2209), the state B flag is turned ON (S2210), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2211), and processing is performed. Finish. As a result, a high base state of up to 100 times is set after the big hit game is completed, and the game state becomes a high accuracy high base state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2209 that the completed jackpot game is not the 2R 6th jackpot, that is, either the 4R 1st jackpot, the 15R 3rd jackpot, or the 4R 4th jackpot (NO in S2209), the state B flag. Finishes the process without turning on (while keeping it off). As a result, the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high-accuracy low-base state.

On the other hand, in S2201, when it is determined that the end of this time is not a probability variation jackpot, that is, a low probability jackpot (low probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), then the finished jackpot game is the 2Rth. 7 Determine if it is a big hit (S2206). As a result, when it is determined that the finished jackpot game is the 2R 7th jackpot (YES in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2207), the state B counter is set to "100" (S2208), and the process is performed. Finish. As a result, a high base state of up to 100 times is set after the big hit game is completed, and the game state becomes a low accuracy high base state.

On the other hand, in S2206, when it is determined that the completed jackpot game is not the 2R 7th jackpot, that is, the 4R 2nd jackpot or the 2R 8th jackpot (NO in S2206), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and the state is changed. Set "50" in the B counter (S2205) and finish the process. As a result, a high base state of up to 50 times is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the game state becomes a low accuracy high base state. The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the above game state setting process (S2121) functions as a “game state setting means”.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
As shown in FIG. 42, in the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag is ON (S3001), and when it is determined that it is ON (YES in S3001). ), That is, when the big hit game this time is related to the special symbol 1, the special figure 1 big hit flag is turned off (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is completed. .. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, when it is determined in S3001 that the special figure 1 jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S3001), that is, when the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON and the current jackpot game is related to the special symbol 2 ( NO in S3001), turn off the special figure 2 jackpot flag (S3004), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3005), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 43, in the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the large winning device (second large winning device 36) has been completed in the small hit game. When it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is open (S2302). If it is determined in S2302 that the big prize opening (2nd big prize opening 35) is not open (NO in S2302), it is time to open the big winning opening (2nd big winning opening 35), that is, Whether it is time to start the first opening operation after the opening time of the small hit, or whether it is time to start the next opening operation after the closing time between multiple openings has passed. (S2303). Regarding the small hit game, regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate 29, the small hit game (opening operation of the second large winning opening 35) is performed after a predetermined time has passed after the confirmation stop display of the small hit symbol is displayed. To be started. That is, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by passing the game ball through the start gate 29, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit game.

If S2303 determines that it is not the time to open the big prize opening (NO in S2303), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2303 that it is the opening time of the big winning opening (YES in S2303), the opening processing of the second big winning opening 35 is performed according to the opening pattern of the small hit (see FIG. 6) (S2304). To finish.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2302 that the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the ball enters the second big winning opening 35 during the two opening operations. It is determined whether or not the number, that is, the number obtained by adding all the game balls entered in the two opening operations, has reached the specified maximum number of entered balls (10 in this embodiment) (S2306). As a result, if it is determined that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is time to close the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35), that is, the big winning. It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the mouth was opened (S2307). Then, when it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2307), the process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2306 that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the two opening operations has reached the specified number of balls (10) (YES in S2306), the large winning opening (second large winning opening) Close the mouth 35) (S2314) and proceed to the S2311 process. In addition, when it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hit opening counter is set. One decrement is performed (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit open counter is "0" (S2310). Then, when it is determined that the value of the small hit opening counter is not "0" (NO in S2310), the next opening operation is started, so that the process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the small hit open counter is "0" (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to S2311.

In S2311, a small hit ending command is set as a small hit end process for ending the small hit game (S2311). Next, the ending period of the small hit is started (S2312), the small hit end flag is set (S2313), and the processing is completed. The small hit opening counter becomes "0" when the second large winning opening 35 is opened twice.

Further, when it is determined in the above-mentioned S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), the two opening operations of the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) are completed (or). Since the specified number of game balls have entered), it is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has passed (S2315), and if it is determined that the ending time has not passed (NO in S2315), processing is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), the special figure operation status setting process 2 is performed (S2317), and the process is completed. In the high-accuracy and low-base state, by generating a small hit game, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls held, and the interest of the game is enhanced. At the start of the small hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF, and are not switched from OFF to ON. In addition, the game state setting process is not performed at the end of the small hit game. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game. The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the above special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) functions as a “second special game execution means”. In addition, it also refers to either one or both of the above-mentioned first special game execution means and the second special game execution means, and is also referred to as "special game execution means".

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
As shown in FIG. 44, in the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON. When it is determined (YES in S3101), that is, when the small hit game this time is related to the special symbol 1, the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), and the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1". Set to (S3103) and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment does not have a small hit as a result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination, it is not determined in S3101 that the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON. However, a small hit may be provided in the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination, and in this case, it may be determined in S3101 that the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3101 that the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S3101), that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, and the small hit game this time is related to the special symbol 2. In this case, the special figure 2 small hit flag is turned off (S3104), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "1" (S3105), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Holded ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number processing (S209) after the special drawing 2 operation processing (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read out ( S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls command for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90 or the like) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process is completed.

[Power failure monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power failure monitoring process (S210) after the hold ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 46, in the power cutoff monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not there is an input of the power cutoff signal (S2601), and when it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2601 that there is an input of a power cutoff signal (YES in S2601), the current state of the gaming machine 1 (whether it is a probability change, whether it is in a winning game, the number of reserved balls is several, the probability change / time reduction). Data related to (the number of remaining fluctuations is several, etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power off flag is turned on (S2603), and then loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to interrupt processing (S105).

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a big hit game based on the fact that the special symbol is a big hit in the hit / fail judgment (the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed by the big hit symbol). When it is executed and the type of jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, a high probability state (privilege is given) occurs, and when a predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied, the high probability state (privilege) is terminated. The game state setting process (S2121), which is a process for granting this high-probability state (privilege), can also be referred to as a “privilege granting means”.

The first special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the second special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the variable display and the stop display are displayed, respectively, and the same pass / fail judgment is made. Since the result is shown, "the special symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed at the hit symbol" can be replaced with "the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the hit effect symbol".

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the main operation (control processing by the sub-control unit) of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, timers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads and executes the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, the CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) and other settings, various flags, status and counter resets are performed.

Next, in S4002, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, if the power off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized, but due to a power failure or the like. If the power off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. The processing of S4001 to S4003 is executed only once after the power is turned on (at the time of turning on the power), and is not executed after that. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 also performs the same processing as the power off monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. 11, and the power off signal is turned on due to a power failure or the like. Then, the data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, the data related to the effect control when a power failure such as a power failure occurs is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) after the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed. The state of is returned to the state before the power failure occurred.

Next, interrupts are disabled in S4004 (S4004), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

The random number for determining the effect includes a random number for determining the variable effect that determines the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect pattern game effect to be executed, a random number for determining the advance notice effect that determines the advance notice effect, and a random number for determining the effect symbol that determines the effect symbol. There are random numbers and so on. These random number update methods can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random numbers, the random numbers may not be added one by one, but may be added two by two. The random number for determining the effect is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) notifying that the starting ball has arrived is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80 ( It can be used when a variation start command) is transmitted, when a variation effect pattern described later is determined, or the like. The storage location of the acquired random number for determining the effect is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also referred to as “sub-output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp. Among the control boards 107, the command is transmitted to the control board to which the corresponding command is transmitted. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various effect devices (image display device, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. (Direction pattern game production, special game production related to hit game, etc.) is executed.

Next, S4007 allows interrupts (S4007), and then loops S4004 to S4007. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of the effect display executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 can be performed. , It is possible to control the lighting of various lamps, control the operation of movable decorative members, control the sound output from the speaker, and the like.

[Receive interrupt processing]
As shown in FIG. 48, in the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is the external INT of the effect control microcomputer 91. It is determined whether or not the signal has been input to the input unit (S4101). Then, when it is determined that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is completed. This receive interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 2 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 49, in the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, an input process for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). .. Next, the lamp data output process (S4202) for outputting the lamp data for causing the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 to emit light, and the drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203) is performed. The lamp data and the drive data are created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, the watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 50, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, the receive command analysis process (S4302), the small hit prize ball counting process (S4303), and the big hit prize ball counting process (S4304), which will be described later, are performed. Next, a switch state acquisition process (S4305) is performed in which the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as the switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process, and the switch state acquisition process is performed. A switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the stored switch data is performed (S4306). After that, other processing such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the random number for determining the effect is executed (S4307).

[Received command analysis processing]
As shown in FIG. 51, in the reception command analysis process (S4302), it is first determined whether or not the start entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and it is determined that the start entry command has not been received. If (NO in S4401), the process shifts to S4403 processing, and if it is determined that the start entry command has been received (YES in S4401), the effect hold information storage process (S4402) is performed and the process shifts to S4403 processing. ..

In the effect hold information storage process (S4402), various information (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination disorder) included in the start entry command (special figure 1 start entry command or special figure 2 start entry command) received in S4401. Game information such as numerical values and fluctuation patterns random values) according to the type of special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) and the number of special symbol reserved balls when sending and receiving the start entry command (at the time of command generation). , It is stored in a predetermined effect hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in the shift memory format. For example, when the received start-in ball command is the special figure 1 start-in ball command corresponding to the number of reserved balls "4" in the special figure 1, the pre-judgment result and the hit type included in the special figure 1 start-in ball command. Etc. are stored as the special figure 1 effect hold information in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area. The effect hold information stored in this way is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage content (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area in the sub-control board 90 is the special figure hold storage unit (first special figure hold storage unit, second special figure) in the main control board (main control unit) 80 described above. It matches the stored contents (acquired information) of the hold storage unit). From this, it can be said that the effect holding information storage area of the sub-control board 90 is also a “acquisition information storage means”.

Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and when it is determined that the fluctuation start command is received (YES in S4403), the variation effect start processing (S4404) described later is performed. If it is determined that the variation start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the process shifts to the S4405 process without performing the variation effect start process.

In S4405, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to display the variation effect. The variable effect end process to be terminated is performed (S4406). In the variation effect end process (S4406), a variation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variation effect is set in the sub-output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect symbol 8 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The stop display is displayed, and the variable effect (effect pattern game effect) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process shifts to the processing of S4407 without performing the fluctuation production end processing. The variable effect refers to various effects performed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol, such as the variable display of the effect symbol 8 and the reach effect.

Next, the S4407 determines whether or not a hit game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 when executing the hit game (big hit game, small hit game), and specifically, the start of the big hit game (generation of big hit). ), The round start command sent at the start of the round, the round end command sent at the end of the round, the jackpot ending command sent at the end of the jackpot game, the first big prize in the round game Corresponds to the 1st big prize opening command sent based on the entry into the mouth 30, the 2nd big winning opening command sent based on the entry into the 2nd big winning opening in the small hit game, etc. do. The S4407 determines whether or not any of these winning game-related commands has been received, and if it has not been received (NO in S4407), it shifts to the processing of S4409 and if it has been received (YES in S4407). , Performs processing related to the execution of the effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command (S4408).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command that specifies the opening effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if it is a round start command, the command is concerned. Set a round effect command in the sub output buffer to specify the round effect according to the round specified based on, and if it is an ending command, specify the ending effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command. Set the production command in the sub output buffer. If the received command is a large winning opening command (first large winning opening command, second large winning opening entry command), the large winning opening specified based on the command (first large winning opening) A process is executed according to the entry of balls into the mouth 30 and the second prize ball 35), and an effect command for executing the effect of displaying the number of winning prize balls described later is set in the sub-output buffer according to the processing result. do. When various effect commands related to the set hit game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 performs an opening effect and a round according to the progress of the hit game. The effect, the effect of displaying the number of winning prize balls, and the like are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, as the winning prize ball number display effect, the “round winning prize ball number display effect” is executed every time each round of the plurality of round games constituting the jackpot game is performed. And, the "ending winning prize ball number display effect" that is executed during the ending period of the big hit, and the period from the state C after the big hit game to the state A (except during the big hit game) (so-called). It is equipped with a "total number of prize balls displayed" to be executed during the consecutive villa period).

Next, other processing is performed in S4409, and this processing is completed. In the other processing (S4409), for example, processing based on other reception commands (for example, a normal symbol fluctuation start command and a normal symbol fluctuation stop command) other than the above-mentioned various commands is performed.

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the variation effect start process (S4402) executed by the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described. As shown in FIG. 52, in the variation effect start process (S4402), first, a random number process for effect determination (Random number process for effect determination) for acquiring various effect decision random numbers such as a random number for determining variation effect, a random number for determining advance notice effect, and a random number for determining effect symbol. Perform S4501). In this embodiment, the processing of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value (acquired information), the mode of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) to be executed, the mode of the advance notice effect (including the presence or absence of the advance notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the like are determined.

Next, S4502 analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern specification command (information for designating the variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the variation pattern designation command includes the variation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for designating the current gaming state, the determination result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination or the second special symbol winning / failing determination, and the like. It contains symbol information and the like that specify the jackpot type (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are two types of variable pattern designation commands, one corresponding to the first special symbol and the other corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variable pattern designation command, the effect symbol game production to be started this time is performed. It is possible to determine whether the (variable display of the effect symbol) is related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. The variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in other processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "4", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to D. Specifically, the mode status "1" corresponds to the production mode A, the mode status "2" corresponds to the production mode B, the mode status "3" corresponds to the production mode C, and the mode status "4" corresponds to the production mode C. Corresponds to production mode D. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect mainly using the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, a part or all of the effect modes of the game effect such as the advance notice effect and the reach effect are different. .. Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is different depending on the effect mode, such as different aspects of the effect symbol 8 (for example, symbol design, number design, etc.), different characters, items, and background images. It will be different. In addition, the effect design game effect can also be executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode, and when a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects can be executed depending on the effect mode. Can be.

In this embodiment, the effect modes A and B are executed when the low accuracy and low base state is controlled, the effect mode C is executed when the high accuracy and low base state is controlled, and the effect mode D is low. It is executed when it is controlled to the high accuracy base state and when it is controlled to the high accuracy high base state. Therefore, when the effect mode is any of A to C, the player confirms the effect mode to grasp whether the current game state is the low accuracy low base state or the high accuracy low base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the effect mode is D, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current game state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state even if the effect mode is confirmed. be. In that sense, the effect mode D can be said to be a game state non-notification mode.

Next, in S4504, the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like are used to determine the variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern) that the sub-control unit 90 mainly controls. The variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) and the advance notice effect determination table for determining the advance notice effect pattern (notice effect pattern) are set (S4504). Specifically, the variation effect pattern determination table, the advance notice effect determination table, and the like to be used are set based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80. That is, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of advance notice effect determination tables are provided, and a predetermined variable effect pattern determination table and advance notice effect determination table are set from among them based on the game state (effect mode) and the like. do. For example, when the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), the variation effect pattern determination table is used as the variation effect pattern determination table at the time of a big hit corresponding to the current effect mode. A variable effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode (variable mode of the effect symbol, etc.) of the effect symbol game effect, and is a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status). (Not shown) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, the table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from those variable effect pattern determination tables.

Next, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the variation effect acquired in S4501 and the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504, the variation effect pattern matching the specified variation pattern is selected and set (S4505). ). As the variation effect pattern, a variation mode (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) of the effect symbol 8 displayed mainly in the effect symbol display area 7b is set. As a result, in the variation effect (effect pattern game effect), when the reach effect is executed (variation effect with reach) or when the character effect performed using a specific character is executed (character variation effect), the reach effect or the character When the effect is not executed (variable effect without reach) is determined.

In the reach effect, for example, as a display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are the same (doublet). In the case where the mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped display (temporary stop display) with the symbols constituting the jackpot mode (same effect symbol). ), And with the remaining one continuing the variable display (scroll display), whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol (three same effect symbols) that completes the jackpot mode. It is a production that shows. At this time, a game effect is executed using a predetermined character along with the variable display of the effect symbol, and whether or not the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode is determined by whether or not the predetermined character achieves the predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show it in the production of. Such a game production (reach production or character production described later) can also be referred to as a story production (specific game production) or a purpose production (specific game production). As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for a big hit and enhance the game interest.

Further, in S4505, the effect symbol 8 (also referred to as “stop effect symbol”) to be stopped and displayed is determined and set based on the random number for determining the effect symbol acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown). As for the effect symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed (fixed stop display) as a result of the variable effect, if the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is out of order and there is a reach, there are three effect symbols 8L, 8C such as "787". , 8R, one of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, such as "635", if one of the production symbols is different from the other production symbols and is out of reach It is said that the design is different from the other production designs. On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, and the big hit is a big hit (any of 4R 1st big hit, 15R 3rd big hit, and 4R 4th big hit) that triggers the setting of the high accuracy and low base state. Is doublet of "777", and in the case of 4R second big hit, doublet other than "777" (for example, "222", "555", etc.). In addition, in the case of a 2R jackpot, the mode is the same as in the case of a detachment. Further, when the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination is a small hit (only the second special symbol winning / failing determination in this embodiment), it is set as a predetermined chance item (specific variation item described later) such as "335". The 2R jackpot may also be doublet or a predetermined chance. Further, the stop display mode of the effect symbol 8 shown in this embodiment is merely an example, and what is stopped and displayed as the stop effect symbol can be appropriately set.

Further, in S4506, the advance notice effect to be executed according to the variable effect pattern (variable effect, effect pattern game effect) is determined. It is also called a variable production (production design game production) including this execution notice production. The advance notice effect is an effect that suggests in advance the possibility that the result of the variable display (variable effect) currently being executed or the result of the variable display (variable effect) executed later will be a jackpot mode (expected degree of jackpot). That is. The advance notice production is also called "suggestion production" or "advance notification production". In S4506, based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect acquired in S4501 and the advance notice effect determination table set in S4504, the specified variation pattern and the advance notice effect matching the determined variation effect pattern are selected and set. (S4506).

Next, in S4507, based on the variation effect pattern and the advance notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, the variation effect start command for starting the variation effect and the like is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4507). , Finish the variable production start process. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 determines the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. Predetermined image data for fluctuation effect (image data constituting the change start, change in progress, change stop, etc. of the effect symbol 8) corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in, and the advance notice effect specified based on the variation effect start command. The pattern, that is, the predetermined advance notice effect image data corresponding to the advance notice effect pattern set in S4506 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect and the advance notice effect based on the read image data are displayed on the image display device. Run on screen. In addition, the variable display (blinking display) by the two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Outline of variable production]
Next, the outline of the variable effect (effect pattern game effect) of this embodiment will be described. As described above, when the variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the display screen 7a of. As a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the variable display of the effect symbol 8, the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) is configured.

As described above, in principle, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is in the order of "1"-> "2"-> "3" ...-> "7"-> "8"-> "9" (ascending order) in the vertical direction. Scroll display (vertical scrolling) is performed, and when it reaches "9", it returns to "1" and repeats vertical scrolling. The mode of the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is determined by the variation effect pattern stored in the variation effect pattern determination table described above. For this reason, in addition to vertical scrolling, there are various modes of variable display, such as horizontal scrolling display (horizontal scrolling) and switching display in which symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. The mode can be provided as a variable effect pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols "1" to "9" are variablely displayed in descending order. Further, it is also possible to set the mode of variable display depending on the effect mode and the game state.

The variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed according to the variation time determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display is stopped as the variation time elapses. In this embodiment, a plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) are provided as modes for stopping the variable display. Specifically, (1) the stop order (also referred to as "stop order") of each of the effect symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is "left symbol → middle symbol → A stop mode (also referred to as "first stop mode") as "right symbol" and (2) a stop mode in which the stop order of each symbol is "left symbol-> right symbol-> middle symbol" ("second stop"). (Also referred to as "aspect") and (3) a stop mode in which all the stop timings (stop timings) of each symbol are substantially the same (also referred to as "simultaneous stop") (also referred to as "third stop mode"). And (4) a stop mode (also referred to as a "fourth stop mode") in which the stop time of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same and the middle symbol is stopped after that.

These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and which stop mode is used to stop the variation display is determined by the variation effect pattern selected (set) in S4505. It has become. That is, in this embodiment, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern also serves as the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, it is also possible to separately process the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern and the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern).

The stop symbol with the first stop order is also called the "first stop symbol", the stop symbol with the second stop order is also called the "second stop symbol", and the stop symbol with the third stop order is the third stop symbol. This is also called a "third stop symbol" or a "final stop symbol".

Further, in this embodiment, the symbols "1" to "9" constituting the effect symbol 8 are colored so that they can be classified by color, and the type of symbol (symbol type) is determined by the color. As shown in FIG. 53, this symbol type corresponds to the game state (effect mode). Specifically, in the state A (effect modes A and B), "7" among the odd-numbered symbols is a red symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as "red symbol"), and other odd-numbered symbols "1" and "3". , "5", "9" are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "green symbols"), and even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6", "8" are blue symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as "green symbols"). It is also called "blue pattern"). On the other hand, in states B and C (effect modes C and D), among the odd-numbered symbols, "3", "5" and "7" are red symbols, and the other odd-numbered symbols "1" and "9" are green. The symbols are even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" as blue symbols.

It should be noted that the correspondence between the design and the color according to the present embodiment shown in FIG. 53 is merely an example, and it is possible to adopt a correspondence relationship other than this, and the type of color is not limited to this embodiment. , Other colors can be used. Further, in this embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by the color, but it can also be determined by an element other than the color. For example, the type of character when a character is attached to the effect symbol, and the number symbol when there is an effect symbol (character symbol) representing a predetermined character in addition to the effect symbol (number symbol) representing a number. The symbol type may be determined by the character symbol, and further, the symbol type may be determined simply by the odd symbol and the even symbol.

The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed, and the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derivated display) when the variable display is stopped according to the above-mentioned stop mode is used. The result of the fluctuation display is notified. In this embodiment, as a basic symbol combination (stop display mode), there are "completely disjointed eyes" ("124", etc.) in which all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are different symbols (numbers), and the effect symbols. 8L (left symbol) and production symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number), and the remaining production symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a different symbol (number). ) Is an out-of-order mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the execution of the winning game. On the other hand, "doublet" ("777", etc.) in which all three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same is used as a jackpot mode (specific mode) that triggers the execution of a jackpot game (see FIG. 6) of 4R or more. There is.

On the premise of such a basic combination of symbols, in this embodiment, the "reach barrage" among the loose stitches is also used as the 2R jackpot mode that triggers the execution of the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). .. This is because the number of prize balls that the player can acquire (the number of prize balls won) is smaller in the 2R jackpot game than in the 4R or higher jackpot game (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game), and the state C (high). It is a special game that triggers the setting of state B (high base state), which makes it more difficult to obtain a prize ball (increase the number of balls held) in a small hit game than (probability low base state), that is, for the player. This is because it is a special game with a relatively low degree of advantage. Further, among the loose stitches, the "completely loose stitch" is also used as the small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). This is because, as described above, in the state B, the second starting port 21 is in the open state for most of the time, so that the small hit large winning opening (second) located on the downstream side of the second starting port 21. This is because it is difficult to enter the large winning opening 35), and it is extremely unlikely that a small hit will be profitable (nearly zero) (substantially equivalent to a loss). Further, among the loose stitches, the "specific loose stitch" described later is set as a small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (small hit of the second special symbol) in the state C (high accuracy and low base state).

Since the state A (low probability low base state) is a game state in which a left-handed game is basically performed, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) is mainly performed. Yes, since it is rare that the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (change display of the second special symbol) is performed during the change display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made under such a situation. When this is done, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but only the variation display (and stop display) by the effect display 102 is performed. There is. Similarly, since the state B (high base state) and the state C (high accuracy low base state) are game states in which the right-handed game is basically performed, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (second special) is mainly performed. (Variation display of symbols) is performed, and it is rare that the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed during the variation display of the second special symbol. When the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made below, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation display by the effect display 102 ( And stop display). However, when a special symbol hit / fail judgment contrary to the current game state (left-handed game, right-handed game) is performed and a judgment result of "big hit" is obtained (for example, in the state C, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made. When it is performed and a big hit is obtained, one or more of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 suggest the occurrence of the big hit (for example, " Display a message such as "The remaining XX seconds until the chance arrives"). As a result, while the effect display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to the current game state (variation display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, the effect display is performed in parallel with the variation display of the main special symbol. It is possible to inform the player that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of such a big hit, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player stops the game without noticing the occurrence of the big hit and misses the opportunity to earn a profit.

[Game production in state A]
Next, the game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state A (low accuracy low base state) will be described. The game effect performed in the state A is a variation effect mainly performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination. As described above, in the state A, "A" or "B" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the variation effect of the state A is performed under the condition that the background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode A or B is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this embodiment, the effect mode is set or shifted in the state A under the control of the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) according to a predetermined mode control condition.

Further, in the state A, as the effect symbol 8, the symbols "2", "4", "6", "8" consisting of blue symbols and the symbols "1", "3", "5", "5" consisting of green symbols are used. The symbol "9" and the symbol "7" consisting of the red symbol are displayed (see FIG. 53). The display of each of these symbols is performed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying this on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Will be executed.

Under such an effect mode and symbol type, as shown in FIG. 54, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 54 (a)), the variation display is basically the second stop mode. It is stopped at (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (see Fig. 54 (b) → (c) → (d), (e) → (f)), and the shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 When the function is activated (see S1707 in FIGS. 9 and 24), it is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 54 (g)). Here, when the left symbol (directed symbol 8L) and the right symbol (directed symbol 8R) stop at the same symbol, the reach is established (see FIG. 54 (f)), and then the middle symbol (directed symbol 8C) is displayed in a variable manner. Until it is stopped, the reach effect is executed on the image display device or the like. In the reach effect, the effect indicating whether or not the middle symbol (final stop symbol) stops at the same symbol as the previously stopped symbol (left and right symbols) (whether or not the jackpot mode is displayed) is developed. NS. The same applies to the states B and C with respect to the establishment of reach and the effect of reach.

While the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in different stitches (completely loose stitches or reach loose stitches) as a result of the variable display, it is "off". On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in doublet (big hit mode) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display contents on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 However, it is switched to the big hit game production for 4R big hit related to the first special symbol. When the big hit game is related to the "4R first big hit", the game state after the big hit game is completed is the state C (high accuracy and low base state), and the game is related to the "4R second big hit". In the case of, the game state after the end of the big hit game is the state B (low accuracy and high base state) (see FIG. 6).

[Game production of state B]
Next, the game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state B (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) will be described. The high-accuracy high-base state is set after the end of the jackpot game based on the occurrence of the "2R fifth jackpot" or the "2R sixth jackpot" in the state C (high-accuracy low-base state).

The game effect performed in the state B is a variation effect mainly performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination. As described above, in the state B, "D" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the effect symbol game effect in the state B is performed under the condition that the background image or the like (not shown) corresponding to the effect mode D is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this embodiment, the effect mode D corresponding to the state B is set according to the transition to the state B under the control of the sub control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91).

Further, in the state B, as the effect symbol 8, the symbols "2", "4", "6", "8" consisting of blue symbols, the symbols "1", "9" consisting of green symbols, and the red symbol are used. The symbols "3", "5", and "7" are displayed (see FIG. 53). The display of each of these symbols is performed by the image control microcomputer 101 reading the image data (symbol data) of the corresponding symbol from the ROM of the image control board 100 and displaying this on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Will be executed. In this embodiment, the mode (design) of the effect symbol 8 is different between the state A and the state B.

Under such an effect mode and symbol type, as shown in FIG. 55, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 55 (a)), the variation display is basically a third stop mode. It is stopped at (simultaneous stop) (see FIG. 55 (b)). This is because in the state B, the second special symbol time saving function and the high base generation function are activated, so that the missed fluctuation without reach and the small hit fluctuation are digested in the shortest possible time so that the game can proceed smoothly. Because. When the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big hit game) immediately after the stop, so that the player's expectation can be expected. Don't be afraid of people. On the other hand, when an out-of-reach fluctuation or a jackpot fluctuation with reach (that is, "reach fluctuation") is performed, or when a normal fluctuation is actually performed by pretending to be a reach fluctuation, "reach fanning deviation fluctuation" (a type of fluctuation mode without reach) is performed. If so, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIGS. 55 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → ( f) See).

While the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a loose pattern (disengagement mode) as a result of the variation display, it is "off". On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in doublet (big hit mode) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is cut into the big hit game effect. Instead, round production is performed according to the progress of the big hit game. In the state B, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the doublet jackpot mode, the jackpot game is related to "15R 3rd jackpot" or "4R 4th jackpot". A big hit game effect for 3 big hits or a big hit game effect for 4R 4th big hit is performed. Then, the game state after the jackpot game is completed is the state C (high accuracy and low base state) (see FIG. 6).

Further, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the reach loose pattern (2R jackpot mode) as a result of the variable display, the display content on the display screen 7a is cut into the jackpot game effect for the 2R jackpot with the start of the jackpot game. It will change. Then, when the started big hit game is related to "2R 5th big hit" or "2R 6th big hit", the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a high accuracy high base state (state B). When the big hit game is related to "2R 7th big hit" or "2R 8th big hit", the game state after the big hit game is completed is the low accuracy high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

Further, in the state B, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit and the variation display of the effect symbol 8 based on this is performed, the variation display is performed in the normal variation and stopped in the third stop mode. NS. Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (off mode) (see FIG. 55 (b)). When a small hit is made in the state B, the small hit game is executed, but even if the small hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a remains as the effect symbol game effect (here, the effect symbol). 8 is displayed in a completely disjointed manner), and the effect during the small hit game (small hit game effect) is not particularly performed. This is because, as described above, the small hit in the state B is substantially equivalent to the deviation. Then, the gaming state after the end of the small hit game remains in the state B unless it overlaps with the transition timing of the gaming state based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol.

In addition, in the low accuracy high base state which is the state B, when the variation display of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this embodiment) without a big hit. , The game state shifts to the state A (low accuracy low base state) at the end (stop) of the predetermined number of fluctuation display (disengagement fluctuation), and the effect mode is changed from "D" to "A" or "B" (mode). The status shifts from "4" to "1" or "2"). In addition, when the variable display of the special symbol (mainly the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this embodiment) without a big hit in the high accuracy and high base state which is the state B, At the end (stop) of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays (disengagement fluctuations), the game state shifts to state C (high accuracy and low base state), and the production mode changes from "D" to "C" (mode status is "4"). To "3").

[Game production in state C]
Next, the game effect performed when the game state is controlled to the state C (high accuracy and low base state) will be described. The game effect performed in the state C is mainly a variation effect (effect symbol game effect) performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, and a small hit occurrence. It is a production (small hit game production) that accompanies. The state C is an advantageous gaming state (specific gaming state, specific period) in which a prize ball can be expected to be obtained by the small hit between the big hits by causing the small hits to occur frequently until the next big hit occurs. For this reason, in the state C, it is decided to perform a special effect in which the variable effect (effect pattern game effect) and the small hit game effect are linked. Details on this point will be described later.

Further, as described above, in the state C, "C" is set as the effect mode. Therefore, the game effect of the state C is performed under the condition that the background image or the like corresponding to the effect mode C is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The setting of the effect mode in the state C is performed under the control of the sub control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) as in the above-mentioned states A and B. Further, in the state C, as in the state B, as the effect symbol 8, the symbols "2", "4", "6", "8" composed of the blue symbols and the symbols "1", "9" composed of the green symbols are used. And the symbols "3", "5", and "7" composed of the red symbols are displayed (see FIG. 53). In this embodiment, the mode (design) of the effect symbol 8 is the same in the state B and the state C.

As shown in FIG. 56 (A), in the state C (effect mode C), the effect symbol 8 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect symbol 8 corresponds to the effect mode C behind the effect symbol 8. A predetermined character is displayed as a background image to be used. The characters displayed here include a friendly character (first character) and an enemy character (second character), and both characters are displayed facing each other. These characters are displayed even when the variable display of the symbol is not performed. There are multiple types of characters for each of the ally character and the enemy character, and one ally character (also referred to as "ally character") and one enemy character (also referred to as "enemy character") are in the production mode. It is displayed when setting C. The effect display by the character (character effect) is performed, for example, in such a manner that the ally character attacks the enemy character or the ally character is attacked by the enemy character. The effect display (character effect) by such a character is performed as a variable effect based on the variable effect pattern (when it is performed in accordance with the variable display of the identification information), and the result of the variable display becomes a small hit and is a small hit game. There are cases where it is performed as a small hit game effect when is performed (when it is performed in association with a special game after the end of the variable display).

In addition, a right-handed instruction image M for instructing right-handedness is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, and the number of winning prize balls (acquired game value amount) is displayed in the lower right part (first display part) of the display screen 7a. The prize ball count image C1 suggesting is displayed. The prize ball count image C1 of this embodiment includes an image (numerical image) capable of displaying a 5-digit number of "00000" to "99999" and a character image of "pt". This prize ball count image C1 mainly suggests the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls won) acquired by the player (given to the player) in the big hit game and the small hit game, and is in a state. When the game state after the big hit game related to the big hit in A (so-called "first hit") becomes the state C, the total winning prize during that period until the game state returns to the state A (excluding during the big hit game). The number of balls (total number of prize balls won during the consecutive villa period) is suggested (total number of prize balls displayed).

In addition, the state C (high accuracy and low base state) is an advantageous game period (specific period) in which small hits frequently occur in the second special symbol winning / failing determination (the execution frequency of the small hit game becomes high). The prize ball count image C1 is displayed in order to produce the prize ball acquisition (increase in the number of balls held) by the small hit game in the middle. That is, as the small hit game effect, the addition display of the number of acquired prize balls suggested by the prize ball count image C1 (also referred to as “ball entry effect”) is performed. Details of the effect associated with the occurrence of small hits will be described later.

Based on such a screen configuration, the basic flow of the variable display (variable effect) of the effect symbol 8 executed in the state C (effect mode C) will be described with reference to FIG. 57. In FIG. 57, for convenience of explanation, some display contents such as the effect hold (holding symbol), the right-handed instruction image M, and the background are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 57, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started (see FIG. 57 (a)), the variation display is basically stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop) (FIG. 57). 57 (b)). This is because the second special symbol time saving function is activated in the state C, so that the out-of-reach variation without reach is digested in as short a time as possible so that the game can proceed smoothly. When the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the third stop mode (simultaneous stop), it becomes clear to the player that there is no possibility of executing the special game (big hit game, small hit game) immediately after the stop. .. Therefore, when the variable display is stopped in the third stop mode, the effect (fanning effect) for increasing the expectation of the player is not performed. On the other hand, when the reach fluctuation (off or big hit) or the reach fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol) (FIG. 57 (Fig. 57). c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). Further, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination being "small hit", the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol →). It is stopped at (right symbol) (see FIG. 57 (g) → (h) → (i)).

While the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner in this way, if the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a loose pattern (disengagement mode) as a result of the variation display, it is "off". On the other hand, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in doublet (big hit mode) as a result of the variable display, the big hit game can be executed, and when the big hit game is started, the display content on the display screen 7a is cut into the big hit game effect. Instead, round production is performed according to the progress of the big hit game (round game). In the state C, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the doublet jackpot mode, the jackpot game is related to "15R 3rd jackpot" or "4R 4th jackpot" in principle. In this case, the 15R 3rd jackpot A big hit game effect for doublet or a big hit game effect for 4R 4th big hit is performed. Then, the game state after the jackpot game is completed is the state C (high accuracy and low base state) (see FIG. 6).

Further, when the effect symbol 8 is displayed in the reach loose pattern (2R jackpot mode) as a result of the variable display, the display content on the display screen 7a is cut into the jackpot game effect for the 2R jackpot with the start of the jackpot game. It will change. As the big hit game effect in this case, the effect display of the content indicating the end of the state C, that is, the end of the advantageous state (specific period) in which small hits frequently occur is performed from the start to the end of the 2R big hit game. Then, when the executed big hit game is related to "2R 5th big hit" or "2R 6th big hit", the game state after the end of the big hit game becomes a high accuracy high base state (state B). When the big hit game is related to "2R 7th big hit" or "2R 8th big hit", the game state after the big hit game is completed is the low accuracy high base state (state B) (see FIG. 6). ).

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a small hit in the effect mode C (state C) and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in a variable manner based on this, the variable display is performed in the normal variation and the first It is stopped in the stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol). Then, as a result of the variable display, the effect symbol 8 is displayed with a specific variation (small hit mode) (see FIG. 57 (i)). That is, it can be said that the normal fluctuation based on the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination being a small hit is a small hit fluctuation.

Here, in the present embodiment, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are all red symbols, and of the three symbols, two adjacent symbols are the same, and the remaining one is a different symbol combination (“335”, “355””. , "557", etc.) is set as a specific variation (small hit mode). The symbol combination that constitutes a specific variation (small hit mode) does not establish reach, but it constitutes a combination in which two adjacent symbols are the same symbol (number), so such a symbol combination is used. Is also called "reach arrangement".

Of the symbols ("3", "5", "7") that make up a specific pattern (reach arrangement), the symbols "3" and "5" can form a specific pattern in state A. There is no green symbol (first symbol type), but in state C, it is a red symbol (second symbol type) that can form a specific pattern (see FIG. 53). That is, the symbols "3" and "5" are symbols whose symbol types change depending on the game state. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pattern type (color type in this example) of the effect pattern and to attract the interest in the game.

In this embodiment, a part of the effect symbols (“1”, “3”, “5”, “9”) which are considered to be green symbols in the state A can be formed, and a specific variation can be formed in the state C. Although it is a red symbol, for example, a part of the production symbols ("2", "4", "6", "8") which are blue symbols in state A may be red symbols, or blue in state A. Of the production symbols ("2", "4", "6", "8") that are considered to be symbols, and the production symbols ("1", "3", "5", "9") that are considered to be green symbols. It is also possible to make a part of each (for example, "4" and "5") a red pattern. Further, as the symbol type, a symbol type dedicated to the state C, which does not exist in the state A, may be provided, and a specific pattern may be formed by the symbols belonging to the dedicated symbol type. For example, a gold symbol (gold symbol) can be provided as a symbol type dedicated to the state C, and a part of the effect symbol that is a green symbol in the state A can be a gold symbol in the state C. As a result, it is possible to make the symbol types that can form a specific pattern more prominent and to easily attract the attention of the player. Alternatively, in this embodiment, the symbols "3" and "5", which are the green symbols (first symbol type) in the state A, are the red symbols (second symbol type) in the state C, but in this case, , The symbol of "7", which was a red symbol (second symbol type) from the beginning in the state A, may be configured to be a gold symbol in the state C. In this case, the symbols "3" and "5" which are red symbols (second symbol type) are used as symbols that can form a specific doublet, and the symbols "7" which are gold symbols (third symbol type) are used. Can be a 15R jackpot mode (doublet of "7") corresponding to the 15R third jackpot among the jackpots. As a result, the symbol type (red symbol) that can form a specific doublet (small hit mode) and the symbol type (gold symbol) that constitutes a specific doublet (15R jackpot mode) are clearly distinguished and hit. It is possible to show the correspondence between the type and the symbol type in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the derivation display (stop of the variable display) of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbol) in the effect mode C, the first stop mode (left symbol →) that cannot appear in other effect modes. The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the order of stopping the middle symbol → the right symbol). For this reason, the player is attracted not only to the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbol) but also to the stop mode of the variable display that triggers the display of the small hit mode. Further, in the effect mode C, when the small hit mode is derived and displayed (the variation display is stopped), the effect display that emphasizes the display of the small hit mode (reach arrangement of the red symbol) is performed. Specifically, a single line image extending laterally (horizontally) along the stop order of the first stop mode through the center of each symbol (red symbol) constituting the small hit mode, and the periphery of each symbol. The effect image E (effect image), which is composed of the image (decorative image) that decorates the image, is displayed. As a result, the display of the small hit mode (the execution of the small hit game) can be emphasized when the variable display according to the first stop mode is stopped, and when the variable display is stopped in the first stop mode. It is possible to enhance the effect of the production. The aspect of the effect image E is not limited to this embodiment, and various other aspects can be adopted.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game executed with the display of the small hit mode as an opportunity, the total acquisition suggested by the prize ball count image C1 is obtained for each entry. The number of prize balls (numerical image) is added and displayed (updated). In this embodiment, since the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35 is 10 for each entry, the total acquisition suggested by the prize ball count image C1. The number of prize balls is added in units of 10. Further, when the small hit game is executed with the display of the small hit mode as an opportunity, the ally character (first character) and the enemy character (first character) displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a are accompanied by the execution of the small hit game. The effect display (character effect) by the second character) is to be performed.

Specifically, an effect display (also referred to as "first effect") is performed in which one of the ally character and the enemy character (for example, the ally character) attacks or sets the other (for example, the enemy character). It is supposed to be. The character effect (also referred to as "character effect display") in this case does not include the battle effect described later, which depicts the confrontation scene of both characters. The execution period of the small hit game is determined according to the opening time of the large winning opening for small hits (second large winning opening 35), but the opening time of the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game is 1. Because it is 8 seconds, it is difficult to secure the execution time of the battle effect in this time. By performing the character effect along with the small hit game with a short execution time in this way, it becomes easy to make the character effect and the character effect performed as the variable effect described later as a related effect, and from the variable display. Through the small hit game, it is possible to obtain a unified effect (character effect) by the ally character and the enemy character.

The addition display of the prize ball count image C1 accompanying the small hit (addition display in units of 10) is mainly based on the detection of the game ball by the second large winning opening sensor 35a (entry into the second large winning opening 35). It is performed based on the sub-control unit 90 receiving the second big winning opening ball entry command transmitted from the control unit 80, and the character effect display accompanying the small hit is the small hit transmitted from the main control unit 80. Since the opening command (S2066) is received by the sub-control unit 90, all of these effects correspond to the small hit game effects (S4407, S4408). Further, the effect of adding and displaying the total number of acquired prize balls (total acquired game value amount) suggested by the prize ball count image C1 is also the "total number of acquired prize balls display effect". In addition, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 is displayed by adding "10" for each second large winning opening ball entry command (1 reception).

The small hit prize ball counting process (S4303) performed by the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. 58 in relation to the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 associated with such a small hit. As shown in FIG. 58, in the small hit prize ball counting process (S4303), first, it is determined whether or not the current mode status is "3", that is, whether or not the current production mode is "C". (S4601). As a result, if the mode status is not "3" (NO in S4601), the process proceeds to S4615, and if the mode status is "3" (YES in S4601), the second big winning opening ball entry command is received. Whether or not it is determined (S4603). If it is determined in S4601 that the mode status is not "3" (NO in S4601), the current mode status is "1", "2" or "4" (effect mode A, B or D). Become.

If it is determined that the S4603 has not received the 2nd prize opening command (NO in S4603), the process proceeds to S4609 and it is determined that the 2nd prize opening command has been received (S4603). YES), update the small hit prize ball counter CT1 and the total prize ball counter CT2, respectively (S4505, S4506). Here, the values of the counters CT1 and CT2 are added by "10". Then, an addition display command for executing the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 is set in the sub output buffer (S4607). When this set command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 updates the display content of the prize ball count image C1 displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a ( In this example, "10" is added and displayed).

Here, the small hit prize ball counter CT1 is a counter that counts the number of prize balls won by the small hit game executed until the next big hit occurs in a specific period (also referred to as "the number of small hit prize balls won between big hits"). Is. Further, in the total prize ball counter CT2, the 4R first big hit (first hit) occurs in the state A (low probability low base state, effect mode A or B), and the gaming state is changed to the state C (high probability low). The number of prize balls won by the big hit game and the small hit game executed during the period from the base state (directed mode C) to the return to the state A (excluding during the big hit game) (that is, during the consecutive villa period). It is a counter that counts the number of prize balls won. The value (count value) of the total prize ball counter CT2 is linked (matched) with the total number of prize balls won as suggested by the prize ball count image C1. That is, the prize ball count image C1 (total prize ball number display effect) is displayed based on the value of the total prize ball counter CT2.

Next, the S4609 determines whether or not the jackpot ending command has been received (S4609). The jackpot ending command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 80 at the end of the jackpot game as described above, and specifically, is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending period (see S2116 and S2117). .. If it is determined that the jackpot ending command has not been received by S4609 (NO in S4609), this processing ends without performing the processing after S4611.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot ending command has been received in S4609 (YES in S4609), the number of jackpot winning prize balls is displayed to display the number of jackpot winning prize balls in the ending winning prize ball number display effect described later. Set the command and the total number of prize balls display command for displaying the total number of prize balls in the ending winning prize ball display effect in the sub output buffer (S4611), and clear the small hit prize ball counter CT1 (S4611). Zero clear) (S4613). The small hit winning prize ball number display command contains information indicating the value (counting value) of the small hit prize ball counter CT1 at the end of the big hit game (before clearing with S4613), that is, the number of small hit winning prize balls. included. In addition, the total prize ball number display command includes a value (count value) of the total prize ball counter CT2 at the end of the big hit game, that is, information indicating the total prize ball number.

After clearing the small hit prize ball counter CT1 in S4613, that is, after the big hit game is completed, when the game state becomes state C (effect mode C) and the game is performed in a specific period, the next game is performed again. Until a big hit occurs, the number of prize balls won by the small hit game (the number of prize balls won between big hits) is counted by the small hit prize ball counter CT1.

Next, in S4615, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the mode status shifts from "4" to "1" or "2" (S4615). As described above, in the state B (low accuracy and high base state), the mode status is set to "4" and the effect mode is set to "D", but the special symbol (mainly) without a big hit in the state B. When the variation display of the second special symbol) is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times or 100 times in this embodiment), the gaming state is changed to the state A at the end (stop) of the variation display (disengagement variation) of the predetermined number of times. It shifts to (low accuracy and low base state), and the mode status becomes "1" or "2" accordingly (the effect mode becomes "A" or "B"). Corresponding to this, in S4615, whether or not it is the timing when the mode status shifts from "4" to "1" or "2", that is, the gaming state shifts from state B to state A (returns). Determine if it is timing.

When it is determined in S4615 that it is not the timing to shift the mode status from "4" to "1" or "2" (NO in S4615), it is determined that it is the timing to finish this process without performing the process of S4617 and to shift. If this is the case (YES in S4615), the total prize ball counter CT2 is cleared (zero clear) (S4617), and this process is completed. The transition of the mode status from "4" to "1" or "2" means that the gaming state shifts from the state B to the state A and returns to the state of performing the left-handed game, that is, the right-handed game. Since the consecutive villa period, which is the period, ends, the total prize ball counter CT2 is cleared.

As described above, in the effect mode C (state C), the stop in the first stop mode of the effect symbol 8 and the display of the small hit mode occur frequently, and the prize ball count image C1 in the small hit game is accompanied by this. Since the addition display and the character effect display can be executed with high frequency, it is possible to strongly impress the player with the occurrence of the small hit by linking the variable effect and the small hit game effect. As a result, it is possible to raise expectations for winning a prize ball (increasing the number of balls held) due to frequent small hits, and to enhance the game interest in the production mode C (state C).

It should be noted that the character effect display associated with the small hit is performed based on the sub-control unit 90 receiving the second large winning opening ball entry command from the main control unit 80, similarly to the addition display of the prize ball count image C1. It may be configured as follows. In this case, since the character production is not performed unless the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game, the relevant entry when the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 is performed. It is possible to make a strong impression on the player, and it is easy to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the second large winning opening 35 in the small hit game.

Next, the content (effect mode) of the effect display when the reach variation (disengagement or big hit) or the reach fanning deviation variation is performed in the effect mode C will be described. As described above, in the effect mode C, the ally character (first character) and the enemy character (second character) are displayed as the background on the display screen 7a, and the effect symbol game effect (variable display of the effect symbol 8 etc.) ) Is performed (see FIG. 56 (A)). In addition, when the reach fluctuation (off or big hit) is performed and when the reach fluctuation is performed, the fluctuation display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped in the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol). (See FIG. 57 (c) → (d), (c) → (e) → (f)). Under such circumstances, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is started based on the variation effect pattern of the reach variation or the reach deviation variation, the left symbol (effect symbol 8L) is stopped first according to the second stop mode. However (see Fig. 57 (c)), when the left symbol (first stop symbol) stops, a production display depicting a scene in which either the ally character or the enemy character displayed in the background attacks the opponent. (First production) is performed. In this case, the first effect is an effect (character effect) by a character (friend character, enemy character) performed before the right symbol (effect symbol 8R, second stop symbol) stops. The first production can be roughly divided into a pattern in which a friendly character attacks an enemy character (also referred to as "first production pattern A") and a pattern in which an enemy character attacks an enemy character (also referred to as "first production pattern A"). There are two patterns (also referred to as “first effect pattern B”), and for each pattern, there are a plurality of patterns that determine the content (type) of the attack to be launched, the success or failure of the attack, and the like. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, the content of the effect when the first effect is performed suggests information (big hit reliability, content of the effect that can be executed later, etc.) regarding the current variation display (the variation). (Notice) is to be given. The first production is a production in which one of the ally character and the enemy character attacks the other and ends, and does not include the battle production described later.

For example, when the pattern of the first effect (also referred to as the "first effect pattern") is the first effect pattern A (a pattern in which a ally character attacks), at least the 2R jackpot mode is displayed as a result of the variation display. It is suggested that the big hit does not occur, that is, the big hit that triggers the end of the state C, which is an advantageous state in which small hits occur frequently, does not occur. In this case, in the fluctuation, after that, the right symbol (second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without the reach being established, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in complete doublet (off mode). Ruka (reach fanning off fluctuation), or whether the reach is established and the reach effect is developed, but finally the middle symbol stops at a symbol different from the left and right symbols, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in doublet (out of reach). (Variation out of reach) or, after the reach effect, the effect symbol 8 is displayed in doublet (big hit mode) (big hit variation). On the other hand, when the first effect pattern is the opposite first effect pattern B (a pattern in which the enemy character launches an attack), the 2R jackpot mode that triggers the end of the state C is displayed as a result of the fluctuation display. Suggest that there is a possibility. In this case, in the fluctuation, after that, the right symbol (second stop symbol) and the middle symbol (third stop symbol) are stopped without the reach being established, and the effect symbol 8 is displayed in complete doublet (off mode). Ruka (reach fanning off fluctuation), although the reach was established and developed into reach production, the middle symbol finally stopped at a symbol different from the left and right symbols, and the production symbol 8 was doublet (out of reach or 2R jackpot mode). Is it displayed (variation out of reach or variation in 2R jackpot), or the effect symbol 8 is displayed in doublet (big hit mode) after the reach effect (variation in jackpot). In this way, by the first effect performed by stopping the left symbol (first stop symbol), the subsequent development of the fluctuation (whether or not reach is established, whether or not it is advantageous for the player, etc.) is determined. It is possible to suggest. Then, it is suggested that the first effect pattern A is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the first effect pattern B. Such a first effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern, and the first effect is executed in any of a plurality of types of patterns according to the variable effect pattern set (selected) in the above-mentioned S4505. It is decided whether to do it.

In this way, after the left symbol (effect symbol 8L, first stop symbol) is stopped (after the execution of the first effect), the right symbol (effect symbol 8R, second stop symbol) is stopped according to the second stop mode. If the right symbol (number) that stops when is different from the left symbol, the reach is not established, and then the middle symbol (effect symbol 8C, third stop symbol) stops and the variable display ends, and the effect symbol 8 changes. It is displayed in a completely disjointed pattern (disengagement mode). In this case, the fluctuation is a fluctuation that is out of reach (see FIG. 57 (c) → (e) → (f)).

On the other hand, if the right symbol that stops following the left symbol has the same symbol (number) as the left symbol, the reach is established. At this point, the fluctuation is a reach fluctuation (see FIG. 57 (c) → (d)). When the reach is established, a predetermined reach effect (also referred to as “second effect”) is performed on the display screen 7a. The second production is a production by characters (friendly characters, enemy characters) that is performed after the reach is established (after the execution of the first production) and the middle symbol (effect symbol 8C, third stop symbol) is still fluctuating. (Character production), and in this embodiment, it is performed as a battle production that depicts a confrontation scene between a friendly character and an enemy character that had been displayed as a background until then. This second production (battle production) can be roughly divided into a pattern in which a ally character wins a confrontation (battle) (also referred to as "second production pattern A") and a ally character loses in a confrontation (battle). There are three patterns (also referred to as "second production pattern B") and a pattern (also referred to as "second production pattern C") in which the confrontation (battle) is completed without deciding the victory or defeat, and each pattern. There are multiple patterns that determine the type of enemy character, which of the ally character and the enemy character attacks first (the type of character that attacks first), the content of the attack, success or failure, and so on. By providing such a plurality of types of patterns, the information (big hit reliability, etc.) regarding the current fluctuation display (the fluctuation) is suggested according to the content of the production when the second production (battle production) is performed. There is.

For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (B), among the patterns of the second production (also referred to as "second production pattern"), the ally character makes a first strike in the second production pattern A (friend victory pattern). There is a pattern in which the enemy character wins as it is, and a pattern in which the enemy character makes a first strike and the ally character finally wins. Further, in the second production pattern B (friendly defeat pattern), there is a pattern in which the enemy character makes a first strike and the ally character is defeated. Furthermore, in the second production pattern C (win / loss undecided pattern), there is a pattern in which the ally character makes a first strike but the enemy character dodges the attack, and a pattern in which the enemy character makes the first strike and the ally character endures the attack. There is. The second production (battle production) based on these second production patterns starts with the first strike of the ally character or the enemy character, and the production content (confrontation) until the subsequent confrontation result (battle result) becomes clear. Scenes, etc.) are predetermined according to each pattern. Such a second effect pattern is included in the variable effect pattern, and the second effect (battle) is any of a plurality of types of patterns depending on the variable effect pattern set (selected) in the above-mentioned S4505. It is decided whether to execute the production).

In this embodiment, the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a jackpot variation based on the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination being the 15R third jackpot or the 4R fourth jackpot, that is, the result of the variation display. When the effect symbol 8 is displayed in doublet (big hit mode), the second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect pattern A (friend victory pattern) is performed before the display of the jackpot mode (before the derivation display). Will be done. In this case, a 15R or 4R jackpot game is performed after the variation display is stopped (after the jackpot mode is displayed), and the gaming state becomes state C (high accuracy and low base state) again after the jackpot game. Therefore, the player can play the game in the advantageous state (state C) in which the small hits frequently occur again after the big hit game. In this way, since the game in the state C can be continued after the big hit game, the second production pattern A is a pattern in which the ally character wins.

Further, when the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as an out-of-reach variation (reach out-of-reach variation) based on the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination being out of order, that is, the effect symbol 8 is disassembled as a result of the variation display. When it is displayed by the eyes (out-of-order mode), the second effect (battle effect) based on the second effect pattern C (win / loss undecided pattern) is performed before the display of the out-of-order mode (before the derivation display). In this case, after the variation display is stopped (after the disengagement mode is displayed), the game in the state C is continued. Since the game in the state C continues in this way, the second production pattern C is a pattern in which the confrontation (battle) is completed without deciding the victory or defeat.

Further, when the reach variation in the effect mode C is performed as a 2R jackpot variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being a 2R jackpot (any of the 2R 5th to 8th jackpots), that is, the variation. When the effect symbol 8 is displayed as a result of the display in the reach loose pattern (2R jackpot mode), the second effect based on the second effect pattern B (ally defeat pattern) is before the display of the 2R jackpot mode (before the derivation display). (Battle production) is performed. In this case, the 2R jackpot game is performed after the variation display is stopped (after the 2R jackpot mode is displayed), and the gaming state becomes the state B (high base state) after the jackpot game. Therefore, for the player, the game in the advantageous state (state C) in which the small hits frequently occur is completed with the occurrence of the 2R big hit as an opportunity. Since the game state shifts from the state C to the state B via the 2R jackpot in this way, the second production pattern B is a pattern in which the ally character is defeated.

Here, among the second production patterns A to C, the patterns including the content that the ally character makes the first strike are the second production pattern A (friend victory pattern) and the second production pattern C (win / loss undecided pattern). Therefore (see Fig. 56 (B)), for the player, the battle production (second production) is started after the reach is established on the display screen 7a, and the confrontation (battle) in the battle production is the preemption of the ally character. If it starts with an attack, it can be inferred that at least there is no possibility of a 2R jackpot, that is, the end of state C. On the other hand, since all of the second production patterns A to C correspond to the pattern including the content that the enemy character makes the first strike (see FIG. 56 (B)), the player can reach on the display screen 7a. If the battle production (second production) is started after the establishment and the confrontation (battle) in the battle production starts from the first strike of the enemy character, there is a possibility of a 2R jackpot (state C can be ended) at that point. Gender) cannot be excluded. Then, after the enemy character's first strike, if the ally character is defeated and the battle production ends, the pattern of the battle production (second production) is the second production pattern B, so the fluctuation is a 2R jackpot. As a result, the game in the state C ends. On the other hand, if the ally character finally wins and the battle effect ends after the enemy character's first strike, the pattern of the battle effect (second effect) is the second effect pattern A. The fluctuation is a jackpot fluctuation of 15R or 4R, and when the ally character dodges the first strike of the enemy character and the battle production ends, the pattern of the battle production (second production) is the second production pattern C. Therefore, the fluctuation is an out-of-bounds fluctuation, and in any of these cases, the game in the state C can be continuously executed. In this way, in the reach fluctuation in the production mode C, by performing the second production (battle production) based on the second production patterns A to C, the advantageous state (state C) in which small hits frequently occur continues (victory, undecided). ) Or end (defeat), it is possible to obtain a directing effect that arouses the expectations and anxieties of the player. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the variable production (character production) from the first production to the second production (battle production), and it is possible to enhance the game interest of the production mode C (state C). It becomes.

[Round winning prize ball number display production]
Next, the round winning prize ball number display effect of this embodiment will be described. The round winning prize ball number display effect is executed for each round of 1R to 4R of the 4R jackpot game and each round of 1R to 15R of the 15R jackpot game. In the following, a case of a 15R jackpot game will be described as an example.

FIG. 59A shows a round effect screen displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in each round game during the big hit game. As shown in the figure, the round production screen of this embodiment contains information (game value information) regarding the number of prize balls won (number of prize balls paid out) in the current jackpot game and each round game constituting the jackpot game. It is roughly divided into an information display area 7s to be displayed and a round effect display area 7r to which a round effect is displayed. In this embodiment, the information display area 7s is provided on the upper left side of the round effect screen, and the other part is the round effect display area 7r. The right-handed instruction image M is displayed on the right side of the information display area 7s (upper right part of the round effect display area 7r). The right-handed instruction image M is continuously displayed during the right-handed game.

The information display area 7s is provided with a prize ball number image display unit 70. The prize ball number image display unit 70 is provided according to the number of rounds (4R or 15R in this example) of the jackpot game to be executed. In FIG. 59 (A), the prize ball number image display unit 70 corresponding to each round of 1R to 15R is shown by a broken line. The broken line shown in FIG. 59 (A) and the number of rounds in the broken line may or may not be displayed on the actual screen (information display area 7s). Further, in the case of the 4R jackpot game, the prize ball number image display unit 70 corresponding to each round of 1R to 4R is displayed (provided).

The number of prize balls (amount of game value) paid out to the image display unit 70 based on the entry into the first large winning opening 30 in each round game (amount of game value), that is, , A round winning prize ball number image suggesting the winning prize ball number for each round game (also referred to as "round winning prize ball number") is displayed. The display of the image of the number of prize balls won in the round is the effect of displaying the number of prize balls won in the round. The round winning prize ball number image (round winning prize ball number display production) is displayed every time one round game (1 round) is completed, and even after the next round game is started, the round that ended earlier The image of the number of prize balls won in the round related to the game (executed round game) remains displayed.

An image of the number of prize balls won in the round of this embodiment is shown in FIG. 59 (B). As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, three types of round winning prize ball number images 701 to 703 having different display modes are provided. As described above, in this embodiment, the specified number of balls (specified number) of the first large winning opening 30 per round is set to 10, and the winning balls based on the entry into the first large winning opening 30. The number is set to 15 for one ball. For this reason, basically 150 prize balls (specified number of payouts, specified amount) per round unless there is a problem such as a malfunction of the launching device (launching handle) or ball clogging in the game area during the big hit game. Is paid out. In addition, when the round end condition is satisfied by entering the specified number of balls into the first large winning opening 30, and the first large winning opening 30 is closed, depending on the flow situation of the game ball toward the first large winning opening 30. The player may enter a number of game balls exceeding the specified number into the first prize opening 30 just before the closing. If the number of balls entered exceeds the specified number (also referred to as "over-entry"), prize balls will be paid out for the excess number of balls. For example, if 3 over-filled balls occur, 45 prize balls (195 in total per round) will be paid out in addition to the specified 150 balls. The occurrence of such over-balls is a good thing for the player, and the more it occurs, the greater the profit. In view of this, in the present embodiment, the number of round winning prize balls image 701 corresponding to the case where the number of winning prize balls per round (the number of payout prize balls) is 150 or less, and 151 or more and less than 200. A round winning prize ball number image 702 corresponding to the case and a round winning prize ball number image 703 corresponding to the case of 200 or more are provided.

In the round winning prize ball number images 701 to 703 of this embodiment, numbers (characters) suggesting the number of winning prize balls are displayed inside the circle figure, respectively, and the numbers (characters) in the circle and the numbers (characters) in the circle are displayed. The form (display mode) of the line representing the circle is different from each other. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the round winning prize ball number image 701 has a mode in which numbers "0" to "150" are displayed inside a circle drawn by one thin line. (Also referred to as "normal display mode" or "first display mode"), the round winning prize ball number image 702 is "151" to "199" inside a circle drawn by one thick line. The number is displayed (also referred to as "special display mode" or "second display mode"), and the round winning prize ball number image 703 is inside a circle drawn by two thin lines. It is said that the numbers and characters of "200 UP" are displayed (also referred to as "specific special display mode" or "third display mode").

The round winning prize ball number image 701 suggests that the number of balls entered into the first large winning opening 30 is less than or equal to the specified number, and the number of winning prize balls is within the specified number of payouts. On the other hand, the round winning prize ball number images 702 and 703 both indicate that over-entry into the first large winning opening 30 has occurred and the number of winning prize balls has exceeded the specified number of payouts. .. The round winning prize ball number image 702 is displayed when the over-filled number is "1" to "3", and the round winning prize ball number image 703 is displayed when the over-filled ball number is "4" or more. NS.

Here, the fact that two types of images of the number of prize balls won in the round when an over-entry occurs in the first large winning opening 30 is provided is that, as described above, the occurrence of over-entry is advantageous for the player. That is, the larger the number of over-balls, the greater the profit that the player can obtain. Therefore, the number of over-entry balls when over-entry occurs is "1" to "3", which are relatively easy to occur, and "4", which is considered to be less likely to occur. Divided into the above, the case where the profit is particularly large for the player among the over-balls is shown by the round winning prize ball number image 703. From this, it can be said that the round winning prize ball number image 701 is a normal (normal) display mode, and the round winning prize ball number images 702 and 703 are a special display mode.

In this embodiment, any of the round winning prize ball number images 701 to 703 is in the jackpot game (excluding the 2R jackpot game), and at each end of the round game, the round of the prize ball number image display unit 70 is completed. It is displayed in the place corresponding to. Specifically, within the interval time (interval period) from the end of the previous round game to the start of the next round game, the image of the number of round winning prize balls related to the previous round game is displayed. NS. A display example thereof is shown in FIG. 59 (C). In the figure, the number of prize balls won in the 1st round is 150 (no over-entry), the number of prize-winning balls in the 2nd round is 180 (2 over-entry balls), and the number of prize-winning balls in the 3rd round is 165 (over-entry). 1) The number of prize balls won in the 4th round is 150 (no over-entry), and the number of prize-winning balls in the 5th round exceeds 200 (4 or more over-entry). Each time the round ends, one of the round winning prize ball number images 701 to 703 is displayed.

In this embodiment, the interval time (interval period) is set even after the final round of the jackpot game is completed, and when the interval time elapses, the jackpot ending period is started. Therefore, the round winning prize ball number image related to the final round is displayed within the interval time after the end of the final round and before the start of the ending period. At this time, in the information display area 7s (prize ball number image display unit 70), the round acquisition prize ball number image corresponding to each executed round including the final round is displayed, so that the player can use that round. It is possible to grasp (look back) the number of prize balls (prize ball acquisition status) related to each completed round through the image of the number of prize balls acquired.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (C), in the information display area 7s, the ball enters the first big winning opening 30 from the first round to the final round (here, 1R to 15R) of the big hit game. The prize ball count image C2 suggesting the number of prize balls (amount of game value) paid out (given to the player) based on the above, that is, the number of prize balls acquired in one big hit game is displayed. The prize ball count image C2 of this embodiment is composed of an image (number image) capable of displaying a 4-digit number of "0000" to "9999" and a character image of "pt", and is the above-mentioned prize ball. The display mode is the same as that of the prize ball count image C1, except that the count image C1 is one digit less. In this embodiment, the prize ball count image C2 is displayed above the prize ball number image display unit 70. The display position of the prize ball count image C2 is arbitrary.

The prize ball count image C2 is transmitted from the main control unit 80 based on the detection of the game ball by the first big prize opening sensor 30a (entry into the first big winning opening 30) during the big hit game (during the round game). The display content is updated based on the reception of the first prize opening ball entry command by the sub-control unit 90. Specifically, "15" is added and displayed for each command (1 reception) of the first big winning opening.

The display of the round winning prize ball number images 701 to 703 and the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 during the jackpot game is from the first round of the jackpot game until the interval time after the end of the final round elapses (the ending period is It will be done (until it is started). In relation to these displays, the jackpot prize ball counting process (S4304) performed by the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. 60. As shown in FIG. 60, in the jackpot prize ball counting process (S4304), it is first determined whether or not the 4R jackpot game or the 15R jackpot game is being executed (S4701), and it is determined that neither of them is being executed (S4701). NO in S4701), this process is completed without performing the process after S4703.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the 4R jackpot game or the 15R jackpot game is being executed in S4701 (YES in S4701), it is determined whether or not the first big winning opening entry command has been received (S4703), and the game has been received. If it is determined that there is no (NO in S4703), the process proceeds to S4711, and if it is determined that it has been received (YES in S4703), the round prize ball counter CT3 and the jackpot prize ball counter CT4 are updated (S4705, S4707). .. Here, the values of the counters CT3 and CT4 are added by "15". Then, an addition display command for executing the addition display of the prize ball count image C2 is set in the sub output buffer (S4709). When this set command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 updates the display content of the prize ball count image C2 displayed in the information display area 7s (this example). Then, "15" is added and displayed).

Here, the round prize ball counter CT3 is a counter that counts the number of prize balls won for each round game (also referred to as “the number of round prize balls”) during the big hit game. Further, the jackpot prize ball counter CT4 is a counter that counts the number of prize balls won in one jackpot game (excluding the 2R jackpot game) (also referred to as "the number of jackpot prize balls"). The value (counting value) of the jackpot prize ball counter CT4 is linked (matched) with the number of jackpot winning prize balls suggested by the prize ball count image C2. That is, the prize ball count image C2 is displayed based on the value of the jackpot prize ball counter CT4.

Next, S4711 determines whether or not a round end command has been received (S4711). The round end command is a command transmitted from the main control unit 80 at the end of the round as described above. Specifically, the round game end condition (the specified number of balls entered into the first large winning opening 30) It is transmitted every time the ball or the opening time of the first winning opening 30 is established (see S2111 and S2112).

If it is determined that the round end command has not been received in S4711 (NO in S4711), the process shifts to the processing of S4717, and if it is determined that it has been received (YES in S4711), the round winning prize ball number display command is sub-output buffer. (S4713) and clear (zero clear) the round prize ball counter CT3 (S4715). The round winning prize ball number display command includes a value (counting value) of the round prize ball counter CT3 at the end of the round (before clearing with S4715), that is, information indicating the number of round winning prize balls.

When the round winning prize ball number display command set in S4713 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 is specified based on the received round winning prize ball number display command. One of the round winning prize ball number images 701 to 703 according to the number of round winning prize balls corresponds to the completed round of the prize ball number image display unit 70 (see FIG. 59 (A)) in the information display area 7s. It is displayed at the place where the 3R is to be performed (for example, the place of the 3R when the 3R is completed). For example, when the number of round winning prize balls specified based on the round winning prize ball number display command is "150", the round winning prize ball number image 701 (see FIG. 59 (B)) is displayed. Further, when the next round game is executed (started) after clearing the round prize ball counter CT3 in S4715, that is, after the round game is completed, the number of prize balls won in the next round game is the round prize. It is counted by the ball counter CT3.

Next, in S4717, it is determined whether or not the jackpot ending command has been received (S4717), and if it is determined that the command has not been received (NO in S4717), this process ends without performing the process after S4619. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot ending command has been received (YES in S4717), the jackpot for displaying the number of winning prize balls (the number of jackpot winning prize balls) of this jackpot game in the ending winning prize ball number display effect described later. Set the winning prize ball number display command in the sub output buffer (S4719). The jackpot winning prize ball number display command includes a value (counting value) of the jackpot prize ball counter CT4 at the end of the jackpot game, that is, information indicating the number of jackpot winning prize balls.

Next, the value of the jackpot prize ball counter CT4 is added to the total prize ball counter CT2 (S4721), the jackpot prize ball counter CT4 is cleared (zero clear) (S4723), and this process is completed. By the processing of S4721, the value of the total prize ball counter CT2 is the number of prize balls won in the big hit game (the number of prize balls won in the big hit) and the number of prize balls won in the small hit game executed in a specific period (between big hits). The total number of prize balls won by adding the number of prize balls won by small hits) is shown (see S4606).

[Ending winning prize ball number display production]
Next, the ending winning prize ball number display effect of this embodiment will be described. In the ending winning prize ball number display effect, a 15R third jackpot or a 4R fourth jackpot occurs in state C (effect mode C, that is, a specific period), and the final round (15R or 4R) of the jackpot game ends. It is executed during the ending period (also referred to as the "end period") from the time when the variable display of the special symbol becomes feasible. That is, the ending acquisition prize ball number display effect is executed as the ending effect.

When the ending period starts after an interval time after the end of the final round (4R or 15R in this example), the ending effect shown in FIGS. 61A to 61C is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The screens ED1 to ED3 are displayed. In this embodiment, when a 15R third jackpot or a 4R fourth jackpot occurs in the state C, the length of the ending period related to the jackpot is 20 seconds, and during that 20 seconds, FIGS. It is assumed that the ending effect screens ED1 to ED3 shown in C) are displayed.

Specifically, the ending effect screen ED1 (see FIG. 61 (A)) is displayed during the period from the start of the ending period to the elapse of 4 seconds (also referred to as the "first period"), and from the end of the first period. The ending effect screen ED2 (see FIG. 61 (B)) is displayed until 4 seconds have elapsed (also referred to as "second period"), and until 7 seconds have elapsed from the end of the second period (also referred to as "second period"). The ending effect screen ED3 (see FIG. 61 (C)) is displayed on the “third period”). Then, between the end of the third period and the end of the ending period (5 seconds in this example), an effect (not shown) suggesting the transition destination of the next effect mode (game state) is displayed.

On the ending effect screen ED1 displayed in the first period of the ending period, the number of prize balls won by the small hit game executed in the state C, that is, the big hit small hit winning prize in the specific period (small hit rush) The small hit winning prize ball number image 901 suggesting the number of balls is displayed. As shown in FIG. 61 (A), the small hit winning prize ball number image 901 includes a numerical image capable of displaying a four-digit number of "0000" to "9999", an effect image surrounding the number, and an effect image. It consists of a character image representing the characters of "Rush". The 4-digit number (numerical image) included in the small hit winning prize ball number image 901 is the value (counting value) of the small hit winning prize ball counter CT1 included in the small hit winning prize ball number display command set in S4611 described above. ) Is displayed. That is, the small hit winning prize ball number image 901 is an effect image displayed based on the small hit winning prize ball number display command.

On the ending effect screen ED2 displayed in the second period of the ending period, the number of prize balls won by the big hit game that has reached the ending, that is, one big hit game (2R big hit) executed in the state C (specific period) The jackpot winning prize ball number image 902 suggesting the jackpot winning prize ball number related to (excluding the game) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 61 (B), the jackpot winning prize ball number image 902 includes a number image capable of displaying a four-digit number of "0000" to "9999", an effect image surrounding the number, and " It consists of a character image representing the characters of "Big Bonus". The 4-digit number (number image) included in the jackpot winning prize ball number image 902 displays the value (counting value) of the jackpot winning prize ball counter CT4 included in the jackpot winning prize ball number display command set in S4719 described above. Is what you do. That is, the jackpot winning prize ball number image 902 is an effect image displayed based on the jackpot winning prize ball number display command. When the executed jackpot game is a 4R jackpot game, the character (character image) of "Big Bonus" included in the jackpot winning prize ball number image 902 shown in FIG. 61 (B) is "Regular Bonus" (regular bonus). ).

On the ending effect screen ED3 displayed in the third period of the ending period, the number of small hit winning prize balls suggested by the image 901 of the ending effect screen ED1 (first period) and the number of small hit winning prize balls are displayed. The total number of winning prize balls image 903 suggesting the total number of winning prize balls, which is the sum of the number of jackpot winning prize balls suggested by the jackpot winning prize ball number image 902 of the ending effect screen ED2 (second period), is displayed. As shown in FIG. 61 (C), the total number of prize balls image 903 includes a numerical image capable of displaying a four-digit number of "0000" to "9999", an effect image surrounding the number, and " It consists of a character image representing the characters "GET!". The 4-digit number (numerical image) included in the total prize ball number image 903 displays the value (count value) of the total prize ball counter CT2 included in the total prize ball number display command set in S4611 described above. Is what you do. That is, the total winning prize ball number image 903 is an effect image displayed based on the total winning prize ball number display command.

Further, on the ending effect screen ED3, a special image 905 may be displayed according to the total number of winning prize balls suggested by the total number of winning prize balls image 903 (four-digit numerical image). The special image 905 is a comment praising the fact that the total number of prize balls suggested by the total number of prize balls image 903 was equal to or more than a predetermined number, and that the number of prize balls could be obtained (“praise comment”). It is also called.) Is displayed. In this embodiment, the special image 905 is displayed when the total number of winning prize balls suggested by the total number of winning prize balls image 903 is "2500" or more. Further, in this embodiment, the mode of the displayed special image 905 differs depending on whether the total number of prize balls won is "2500" or more and less than "3000" and "3000" or more. .. Specifically, when the total number of prize balls won is "2500" or more and less than "3000", a special image 905 (first special image) representing the characters "Good!" (First praise comment) is displayed. When the total number of prize balls won is "3000" or more, a special image 905 (second special image) representing the characters "Great !!" (second praise comment) is displayed. FIG. 61C shows a case where the special image 905 of "Great !!" is displayed. By displaying such a special image 905, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction with respect to the result of the game.

The special image 905 (praise comment) is displayed, for example, when the jackpot winning prize ball number display command is set in S4719 described above, the display of the special image 905 is instructed based on the value of the jackpot prize ball counter CT4. This can be performed by setting a command (special image display command) and transmitting the command to the image control board 100. Further, when the executed jackpot game is a 4R jackpot game, it is possible not to display the special image 905 (praise comment). This is because the number of prize balls that can be acquired by the player (given to the player) is smaller in the 4R jackpot game than in the 15R jackpot game.

Here, the prize ball count images C1 and C2, which suggest the number of prize balls (given to the player) acquired by the player in the big hit game (first special game) and the small hit game (second special game), The round winning prize ball number images 701 to 703, the small hit winning prize ball number image 901, the big hit winning prize ball number image 902, and the total winning prize ball number image 903 are also referred to as "game value information", and these images (game). The image display device 7 (display screen 7a) that displays (value information), the sub-control unit 90 (manufacturing control microcomputer 91) and the image control unit 100 (image control microcomputer 101) that perform control processing related to the display are "information". It functions as a "display means". Further, among the game value information, the big hit winning prize ball number image 902 is also referred to as "first game value information", and the small hit winning prize ball number image 901 is also referred to as "second game value information". The acquired prize ball number image 903 is also referred to as "third game value information". Further, the jackpot prize ball counter CT4 (S4707) that counts the number of jackpot winning prize balls suggested by the jackpot winning prize ball number image 902 (first game value information) is also referred to as a "first counting means" and is a small hit. Number of winning prize balls The small hit prize ball counter CT1 (S4605) that counts the number of winning prize balls between big hits and small hits suggested by the image 901 (second game value information) is also called a "second counting means" and is total. The total prize ball counter CT2 that counts the total number of winning prize balls suggested by the acquired prize ball number image 903 (third game value information) is also referred to as a "third counting means".

[Action and effect of Example 1]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, each time each of the plurality of (for example, 4 or 15) round games constituting the jackpot game is executed, the player is given a prize in each round game. The round winning prize ball number image (game value information) suggesting the number of prize balls (amount of game value) has been displayed in the information display area 7s (prize ball number image display unit 70) of the display screen 7a ( (See FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (C)). Therefore, as the jackpot game progresses, the player can know the number of prize balls given (acquired) in the jackpot game in round units. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of prize balls (amount of game value) given in each round game and enhance the interest of the big hit game.

In particular, the interval from the end of the first round to the end of the final round until a predetermined display period including the interval period (predetermined period) after the end of the final round (for example, 4R or 15R) in the jackpot game elapses (for example, the interval after the end of the first round). (Until the time elapses), the round winning prize ball number image (game value information) related to the executed round game is displayed in the information display area 7s (prize ball number image display unit 70) in round game units. Therefore, even after all the rounds of the jackpot game are completed, the player can perform each round game that has been executed through the round acquisition prize ball number image displayed in the information display area 7s (prize ball number image display unit 70). You will be able to know the number of prize balls that have been awarded (acquired). This makes it easy to grasp the result of each round game.

Further, as the round winning prize ball number image, there are three types of round winning prize ball number images 701 to 703 having different display modes, and the winning prize ball number (payout number) per round is the specified payout number (payout number). For example, if the number is 150) or less, the round winning prize ball number image 701 is displayed, and if the specified payout number (for example, 199 pieces) or less exceeds the specified payout number, the round winning prize ball number image 702 is displayed. Is displayed, and when the specified number of payouts (for example, 199) is exceeded, the round winning prize ball number image 703 is displayed. That is, when the number of prize balls (amount of game value) given in one round game exceeds the specified number of payouts (specified amount), the display mode of the round winning prize ball number image is different from the normal display mode. Further, when the specified number of payouts (specific amount) larger than the specified number of payouts (specified amount) is exceeded, the display mode of the round winning prize ball number image becomes a specific special display mode different from the special display mode. Therefore, as the jackpot game progresses, the player simply looks at the round winning prize ball number image displayed in the information display area 7s (prize ball number image display unit 70), and the prize given in each round game. It will be possible to know whether the number of balls has exceeded the specified number of payouts and whether or not the specific number of payouts has been exceeded. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the round winning prize ball number image displayed for each round game and to give the player a sense of gain.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the state C (specific period) and the big hit game (first special game) is executed, the first big winning opening 30 is performed in the big hit game. The number of prize balls (amount of game value) given based on the entry into the (first special entrance) is counted by the jackpot prize ball counter CT4 (first counting means). Further, if the small hit game (second special game) is executed before the execution (start) of the big hit game in the state C (specific period), the second big winning opening 35 (second special) is executed in the small hit game. The number of prize balls (amount of game value) given based on the entry into the ball entry port) is counted by the small hit prize ball counter CT1 (second counting means). Then, based on the counting result by each counter, the big hit winning prize ball number image 902 (first game value information) suggesting the number of prize balls given in the big hit game and the small hit game before the big hit game are given. The small hit winning prize ball number image 901 (second game value information) suggesting the number of prize balls is displayed during the ending period at the end of the big hit game. Therefore, when the jackpot game related to the jackpot generated in the state C (specific period) ends, the player has the number of prize balls given (acquired) in the jackpot game and the execution of the jackpot game. It becomes possible to separately know the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls won between big hits) given (acquired) in the small hit game in the state C up to (start). As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest by displaying the image of the number of winning prize balls (game value information) at the end of the big hit game.

In particular, in this embodiment, the small hit winning prize ball number image 901 is displayed first and the big hit winning prize ball number image 902 is displayed later in the big hit ending period (FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B)). (Refer to), the number of prize balls given in the big hit game (the number of prize balls won in the big hit) in accordance with the time series of the game progress when the small hit game and the big hit game are executed in the state C (specific period). ) And the number of prize balls given in the small hit game in the state C before the big hit game (the number of prize balls obtained in the small hit between big hits) can be known step by step. This makes it possible for the player to easily show the result of each hit game.

Further, after the small hit winning prize ball number image 901 and the big hit winning prize ball number image 902 are displayed in the ending period, the number of big hit small hit winning prize balls suggested by the respective prize ball number images 901 and 902 is displayed. The total winning prize ball number image 903 suggesting the total winning prize ball number image including the jackpot winning prize ball number image is displayed (see FIGS. 61 (A) to 61 (C)). That is, the number of prize balls (amount of game value) given in the big hit game related to the big hit generated in the state C and the number of prize balls given in the small hit game in the state C before the big hit game (game value). The total number of prize balls won image 903 (third game value information) suggesting the total number of prize balls won (total game value amount) including the amount) is displayed at the end of the ending period. Therefore, when the jackpot game related to the jackpot generated in the state C ends, the player has the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls won by the jackpot) given in the jackpot game and the state C before the jackpot game. The number of prize balls given in the small hit game executed during (the number of small hit winning prize balls between big hits) and the total number of prize balls given in the double hit game (total number of winning prize balls) are separated from each other. You can know. In particular, after knowing the number of big hit winning prize balls by the small hit winning prize ball image 901 and the number of big hit winning prize balls by the big hit winning prize ball image 902, the total winning prize ball number image 903 is used. Since the number of prize balls is known, it is possible to prevent the total number of prize balls won from being known first. As a result, it becomes possible to further attract the interest of the player to the display of the acquired prize ball number image (game value information) when the big hit game ends.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the possibility that the special symbol is displayed in the small hit symbol (second specific mode) is higher than the possibility that the special symbol is displayed in the big hit symbol (first specific mode). It is said that small hit games are easier to perform than big hit games. Then, in the state C (specific period), the frequency with which the special symbol (second special symbol in this example) is displayed as the small hit symbol becomes higher than in the states A and B (non-specific period), and accordingly. It is said that the execution frequency of small hit games will increase. Therefore, when the small hit game is frequently executed in the state C (specific period), the special symbol is displayed as the big hit symbol and the big hit game is executed, and when the big hit game ends, the big hit A large hit winning prize ball number image 902 (first game value information) suggesting the number of prize balls given in the game is displayed, and the number of prize balls given in the small hit game in the state C (specific period) is displayed. The suggested small hit winning prize ball number image 901 (second game value information) is displayed. As a result, when the jackpot game is executed after the state C (specific period), the player is attracted to the display of the winning prize ball number image (game value information) performed at the end of the jackpot game, and the interest is enjoyed. Can be increased.

Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment of the present invention will be described. This embodiment shows one aspect of the game effect when the small hit game is executed in the above-mentioned state C (high accuracy and low base state). In the following, the configuration of this embodiment will be described mainly on the parts different from the above-described first embodiment, and the description of the parts common to the first embodiment will be omitted as appropriate.

In the state C, the hit / fail determination of the second special symbol is mainly performed, and the second special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are variably displayed based on the result. Then, when the second special symbol and the effect symbol 8 (that is, the identification information) are displayed (stopped display) in the small hit mode (second specific mode), the small hit game is executed. In this embodiment, when the small hit game is executed (when the symbol is displayed in the small hit mode), the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved ball number "1", that is, the small hit game When "specific hold" is stored as the second special figure hold that is first digested after the end of the game, an effect (suggestion effect) that gives a suggestion related to the specific hold is executed during the small hit game. Specifically, there is a possibility that the second special symbol (and the effect symbol 8), which is variablely displayed due to the digestion of the specific hold, is displayed (stopped) in the jackpot mode (doublet), that is, the state C (specification). An effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the 15R third jackpot or the 4R fourth jackpot, in which the continuation of the period) is confirmed, is executed during the small hit game before the execution (start) of the variable display. The suggestion effect performed during such a small hit game is also called "small hit medium suggestion effect". That is, it is possible to execute the small hit middle suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect of the second special figure hold that is stored when the small hit game is executed.

The effect control microcomputer 91 (sub-control unit 90) executes the small hit on hold look-ahead process (S5000) shown in FIG. 62 as the control process related to the execution of the small hit middle suggestion effect. Hereinafter, the hold look-ahead process (S5000) when a small hit occurs in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 62. The hold look-ahead process (S5000) when a small hit occurs can be executed as one process of the hit game effect process (S4408) in the receive command analysis process (S4302) shown in FIG. 51.

[Hold look-ahead processing when small hit occurs]
As shown in FIG. 62, in the small hit hold look-ahead process (S5000), it is first determined whether or not a small hit opening command (see S2066 in FIG. 38) transmitted from the main control unit 80 has been received. (S5001). As a result, if it is determined that the signal has not been received (NO in S5001), this process is completed without performing the process after S5003, and if it is determined that the message has been received (YES in S5001), the second feature currently stored is stored. It is determined whether or not the number of figure reservations (the number of balls reserved in special figure 2) is "1" or more, that is, whether or not the second special figure reservation is stored (S5003).

When it is determined in S5003 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is not "1" or more, that is, "0" (the second special figure reserved is not stored) (NO in S5003), the processing after S5005 is performed. This process is completed without any problems. When the small hit opening command is received (YES in S5001) and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (NO in S5003), that is, the second special figure hold is held at the start timing of the small hit game. If it is not stored, in the small hit game, as described in the first embodiment, the character effect display by the ally character and the enemy character is executed on the display screen 7a. Further, the addition display of the prize ball count image C1 is executed on the display screen 7a based on the entry of the game ball into the second large winning opening 35 opened during the small hit game.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S5003 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (the second special figure hold is stored) (YES in S5003), the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1". It is determined whether or not the second special figure hold corresponding to is a specific hold (S5005). That is, it is determined whether or not the specific hold is stored as the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold ball number "1".

Here, the specific hold means that when the acquisition information stored as a hold in the special figure hold storage unit (acquisition information storage means) is the predetermined acquisition information (also referred to as “predetermined acquisition information”), the predetermined acquisition It means a hold (special figure hold) that corresponds to the information. In this embodiment, the specific hold (that is, predetermined acquisition information) is held (second special feature) that triggers the execution of the variation display of the second special symbol based on the specific variation pattern among the plurality of variation patterns shown in FIG. (Figure pending). Specifically, it is based on any of the fluctuation patterns P25, P26, P28, P29, P31 and P32 (6 types) among the fluctuation patterns P25 to P33 that can be set when displaying the fluctuation of the second special symbol in the state C. The second special figure is on hold, which triggers the execution of the variable display. These six types of fluctuation patterns are fluctuation patterns having a fluctuation time of 45 seconds or 120 seconds (also referred to as "specific fluctuation patterns"). This specific variation pattern is a variation pattern related to the reach variation when the reach variation is performed in the state C (effect mode C). That is, the specific variation pattern is the reach variation pattern of the state C (effect mode C).

As described in the first embodiment, in the state C (effect mode C), the variation display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 is the normal variation (small hit variation), the reachless deviation variation, the reach fanning deviation variation, and the reach fanning variation. Performed with one of the reach fluctuations. Among them, the reach fluctuation is a fluctuation in which the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment has a possibility of a big hit, and the other fluctuations are fluctuations in which there is no possibility of a big hit. That is, the variation effect due to the reach variation is a variation display of the identification information based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment being a big hit, as compared with the variation effect due to the normal variation, the non-reach out-of-reach variation or the reach fanning out-of-variation variation. It can be said that it is a fluctuation effect that is highly likely (easily executed) to be executed along with the jackpot fluctuation). The fluctuation production due to the reach fluctuation is also referred to as a "special fluctuation production", and the fluctuation production due to the normal fluctuation, the out-of-reach fluctuation, or the out-of-reach fluctuation is also referred to as the "normal fluctuation production".

When the reach is changed in the state C (effect mode C), the display screen 7a depicts a scene in which either the ally character or the enemy character displayed as the background attacks the other party (first). After the production) is displayed, the battle production (second production) depicting the confrontation scene between the ally character and the enemy character is displayed after the reach is established. The variation effect including the battle effect (second effect) is the special variation effect, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol that triggers the execution of the special variation effect is the above-mentioned specific variation pattern. Then, the predetermined acquisition information including the fluctuation pattern information corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern corresponds to the specific hold. That is, the specific hold (predetermined acquisition information) is a special figure hold that triggers the execution of the change display of the identification information accompanied by the special change effect (battle effect).

Therefore, in S5005, it is determined whether or not the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold ball number "1" is the special figure hold (specific hold) that triggers the execution of the special variation effect (battle effect). do. As a result, if it is determined that it is not a specific hold (NO in S5005), this process is completed without performing the process of S5007, and if it is determined that it is a specific hold (YES in S5005), the process of S5007 is performed and this process is performed. To finish.

The processing of S5005, that is, the determination of whether or not the second special figure hold (acquisition information) corresponding to the special figure 2 hold ball number "1" stored in the special figure hold storage unit is a specific hold is determined. For example, it is possible to make a judgment based on the effect hold information stored in the above-mentioned S4402. The effect hold information stored in the effect hold information storage area of the sub control board 90 is stored in the special figure hold storage unit (first special figure hold storage unit, second special figure hold storage unit) of the main control board 80. This is because it matches the acquired information, and the acquired information (production pending information) includes a variation pattern random number (variation pattern information), and it is possible to specify the type of the variation pattern based on this.

On the other hand, if it is determined by S5005 that it is not a specific hold (NO in S5005), in the small hit game, the character production display by the ally character and the enemy character, and the prize ball count image based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35 The addition display of C1 is executed on the display screen 7a.

Next, in the S5007, an effect pattern (small hit medium suggestion effect pattern) to be executed in the small hit game to be started is set (S5007). Here, the suggestion effect during the small hit of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 (A) shows a small hit medium suggestion effect (small hit medium suggestion effect screen) displayed on the display screen 7a with the start of the small hit game, and FIG. 63 (B) shows the small hit medium suggestion effect. Indicates a small hit medium suggestion effect (small hit medium suggestion effect screen) displayed on the display screen 7a under the progress of.

As shown in FIG. 63 (A), when the small hit medium suggestion effect is executed (started) with the start of the small hit game, the display screen 7a displays a character image as the main display content of the small hit medium suggestion effect. 910, suggestion image 930 and instruction image 950 are displayed. The small hit medium suggestion effect screen of this embodiment is configured by including the character image 910, the suggestion image 930, and the instruction image 950.

The character image 910 is with the opponent in the battle effect included in the variation effect (special variation effect) accompanying the first variation display (also referred to as "variation display related to the specific hold") due to the specific hold digestion after the small hit game. It is an image showing the face of an enemy character.

The suggestion image 930 is an image suggesting the degree of expectation that the result of the variation display (the first variation display after the small hit game) related to the specific hold will be the jackpot mode (15R third jackpot or 4R fourth jackpot). In this embodiment, the degree of expectation is suggested by the number of stars (★). Specifically, the possibility that the enemy character will win in the battle effect included in the special variation effect executed in the variation display related to the specific hold is defined as the "risk level", and the greater the number of stars (★), the higher the risk level. High, that is, it suggests that the enemy character is likely to win. The victory of the enemy character means that the ally character is defeated, that is, the fluctuation display (special fluctuation production) related to the specific hold is executed as a 2R jackpot fluctuation that will reach the end of the state C (specific period). The Rukoto. Therefore, as the number of stars (★) increases, the possibility of a 2R big hit in the first fluctuation display after the small hit game, that is, the possibility of ending state C (specific period) (risk level) increases, while , The smaller the number of stars (★), the more likely it is that the first fluctuation display after the small hit game will not be a 2R big hit but a 15R 3rd big hit or a 4R 4th big hit, that is, state C (specific period). ) Is more likely to continue (less likely to end (risk)). In this way, the suggestion image 930 (suggestion effect during small hit) sets the expectation degree (that is, the continuation expectation degree of the state C) of 15R 3rd big hit or 4R 4th big hit in the fluctuation display related to the specific hold as a star (★. ) Is suggested by the number of).

The suggestion image 930 (the number of stars (★) included in the suggestion image 930) is also referred to as “suggestion information”. In addition, the number of stars (★) included in the suggestion image 930 suggests that the enemy character may win (the ally character loses) in the battle production executed in the variable display related to the specific hold, so the suggestion image. It can be said that the 930 is an image suggesting the development of the battle effect (content of the variation effect) executed in the variation display (the first variation display after the small hit game) related to the specific hold.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the suggestion image 930 displayed in the small hit medium suggestion effect is that the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game (game by the second large winning opening sensor 35a). It changes based on the detection of the sphere). Specifically, at the beginning of the small hit medium suggestion effect (at the beginning of the small hit game), the suggestion image 930 (default suggestion image) having five stars (★) is displayed, and then the small hit image is displayed. The number of stars (★) included in the suggestion image 930 is reduced based on the entry of the game ball into the second large winning opening 35 during the winning game. FIG. 63 (B) shows a case where the number of stars (★) included in the suggestion image 930 is reduced from 5 to 2 (decreased by 3).

In this embodiment, the method of change when the display mode of the suggestion image 930 changes is determined by the small hit medium suggestion effect pattern, and a plurality of small hit medium suggestion effect patterns having different changes are provided. Specifically, the number of stars (★) changes from the initial (default) of 5 to 4 (decrease by 1), and changes from 5 to 3 (decrease by 2). A total of 4 of the 2nd suggestion effect pattern, the 3rd suggestion effect pattern that changes from 5 to 2 (decrease by 3), and the 4th suggestion effect pattern that changes from 5 to 1 (decrease by 4). It has two patterns. In S5007, one of the first to fourth suggestion effect patterns is selected, and the selected suggestion effect pattern is set. The suggestion effect pattern to be set can be selected based on the fluctuation pattern information included in the predetermined acquisition information corresponding to the specific hold determined in S5005. Then, the selection condition of the suggestion effect pattern can be determined by, for example, the small hit medium suggestion effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, and the suggestion effect pattern to be set can be selected using the table.

As shown in FIG. 64, the small hit medium suggestion effect pattern determination table displays the value (for example, 0 to 99) of the small hit medium suggestion effect determination random number, which is a kind of effect determination random number, in a variable manner related to the specific hold. The data structure is assigned to the fluctuation patterns "1st suggestion effect pattern", "2nd suggestion effect pattern", "3rd suggestion effect pattern", and "4th suggestion effect pattern". In addition, "-" in each table means that the value of the random number for determining the suggestion effect during small hit is not assigned, that is, it is not a selection target (setting target).

Here, as described above, when the reach variation is performed in the state C (effect mode C), the reach variation is performed based on any of the variation patterns P25, P26, P28, P29, P31, and P32. In this embodiment, of the six fluctuation patterns (specific fluctuation patterns), the fluctuation pattern P25 (120 seconds) is set when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is the 15R third jackpot or the 4R fourth jackpot. The fluctuation pattern P26 (45 seconds) is set when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination is a 2R jackpot, and the fluctuation patterns P28, P31 (120 seconds) and the fluctuation patterns P29, P32 (45 seconds) are set. It is set when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is incorrect.

According to the small hit medium suggestion effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, when the small hit medium suggestion effect pattern is set in S5007, the variation pattern of the variation display related to the specific hold is "P25" (15R third big hit or 4R). If it is the fourth big hit), any of the second to fourth suggested effect patterns is set without setting the first suggested effect pattern. In this case, the possibility of setting (selecting) the fourth suggestion effect pattern (selection rate) is the highest, and the possibility of setting (selection) the third suggestion effect pattern and the second suggestion effect pattern is reduced in this order.

Further, if the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display related to the specific hold is "P26" (2R jackpot), any of the first to third suggestion effect patterns is set without setting the fourth suggestion effect pattern. .. In this case, the possibility of setting (selecting) the first suggestion effect pattern (selection rate) is the highest, and the possibility of setting (selection) the second suggestion effect pattern and the third suggestion effect pattern is reduced in this order. The third suggestion effect pattern is much less likely to be set (selected) than the first suggestion effect pattern and the second suggestion effect pattern.

Further, if the variation pattern of the variation display related to the specific hold is "P28", "P31", "P29" or "32" (off), any of the first to fourth suggestion effect patterns is set. In this case, the possibility (selection rate) of setting (selecting) the second suggestion effect pattern is the highest, and the first suggestion effect pattern, the third suggestion effect pattern, and the fourth suggestion effect pattern can be set (selected) in this order. Sexual selection is low. The fourth suggestion effect pattern is much less likely to be set (selected) than the other suggestion effect patterns.

In relation to such setting (selection) possibility (selection rate), when the small hit medium suggestion effect is executed based on the third suggestion effect pattern or the fourth suggestion effect pattern, the variable display related to the specific hold Is more likely to be a 2R jackpot (state C ends) than a 15R third jackpot or a 4R fourth jackpot or miss (state C continues). On the other hand, when the small hit medium suggestion effect is executed based on the first suggestion effect pattern or the second suggestion effect pattern, the variation display related to the specific hold is 15R third big hit or 4R fourth big hit or miss. The possibility of becoming a 2R jackpot (state C ends) is higher than the possibility of becoming (state C continues). Through such a small hit medium suggestion effect, the player is expected to display the big hit mode (excluding the 2R big hit) in the first fluctuation display (variation display related to the specific hold) after the small hit game (expectation of battle victory). It is possible to grasp the degree) and the degree of continuation expectation of the state C, in other words, it is possible to grasp the degree of risk (the degree of end risk of the state C) in which the 2R jackpot mode is displayed. Then, when the number of stars (★) is finally reduced to one (decreased by four), the expectation for the 15R third jackpot or the 4R fourth jackpot will be further increased.

It should be noted that the selection conditions for the small hit medium suggestion effect pattern shown in this embodiment are merely examples, and the selection conditions including the small hit medium suggestion effect pattern can be arbitrarily determined.

In the S5007, one of the first to fourth suggested effect patterns is selected according to the small hit medium suggested effect pattern determination table (selection condition), and the selected suggested effect pattern is set. After that, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a command (small hit medium suggestion effect command) for executing the small hit medium suggestion effect based on the suggestion effect pattern set in S5007 as a small hit game effect in the sub-output buffer. (S4408). When this set command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 displays a small hit medium suggestion effect (small hit game effect) along with the small hit game on the display screen 77a. Run on.

In this embodiment, during the execution of the small hit game (small hit middle suggestion effect), each time the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 (detected by the second large winning opening sensor 35a), the main control board Based on the sub-control board 90 receiving the second big winning opening ball entry command transmitted from 80, the process for reducing the number of stars (★) included in the suggestion image 930 is the effect control microcomputer 91. Is done by. Specifically, every time the second big winning opening ball entry command is received, a command (suggestion mode designation command) instructing to reduce the number of stars (★) by one is transmitted to the image control board 100. As a result, the number of stars (★) included in the suggestion image 930 displayed on the display screen 7a (small hit medium suggestion effect screen) is reduced by one. Therefore, for example, when the small hit medium suggestion effect is executed based on the third suggestion effect pattern, if three game balls enter the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game, a star (★) The number of is reduced from 5 to 3 to 2. On the other hand, for example, even when the small hit medium suggestion effect is executed based on the third suggestion effect pattern, only two game balls enter the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game. If this is not done, the number of stars (★) will decrease by 2 from 5 to 3, and the suggestion effect during the small hit will end as it is.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the small hit middle suggestion effect is executed during the small hit game and the small hit game is completed, the suggestion image 930 (star (★)) displayed on the display screen 7a at the end of the small hit game is completed. The figure) or another image showing the expectation (risk) suggested by the suggestion image 930, that is, the suggestion information is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period after the small hit game. Specifically, the display screen 7a is until the battle effect (second effect) included in the special variation effect executed in the first variation display after the small hit game is started, that is, until the first effect is completed. Suggestion information is displayed in a portion near the outer periphery of the (for example, the left side of the prize ball count image C1). As a result, the player recognizes the content (suggestion information) of the variation display related to the specific hold suggested by the small hit medium suggestion effect even after the small hit game accompanied by the execution of the small hit medium suggestion effect is completed. It becomes possible to (visually recognize). The suggestion information displayed for a predetermined period after the small hit game is displayed based on the effect pattern (any of the first to fourth suggestion effect patterns) of the small hit medium suggestion effect executed during the small hit game. May be done. In this way, the number of balls entered into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game accompanied by the small hit medium suggestion effect is reduced to the number of stars (★) determined by the small hit medium suggestion effect effect pattern. Even if it is not satisfied, it is possible to convey accurate suggestion information to the player after the small hit game.

[Action and effect of Example 2]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the second special symbol and the effect symbol 8 (identification information) that are variablely displayed based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination in the state C (high accuracy and low base state). ) Is displayed (stopped) in the small hit mode (specific mode, second specific mode), and the game ball enters the second special winning opening 35 (special entry opening, second special entry opening). A small hit game (special game) that enables Then, when the specific hold (predetermined acquisition information) is stored when the small hit game is executed, the small hit medium suggestion effect that makes a suggestion related to the stored specific hold (predetermined acquisition information) is performed. It can be performed during the small hit game. By executing the suggestion effect during the small hit during the small hit game, the player can remember the specific hold (predetermined acquisition information) and digest the specific hold (determination result of the predetermined acquisition information). It is possible to know in advance that the variable display based on the game will be executed after the small hit game. Then, when the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 during the execution of the suggestion effect during the small hit (during the small hit game), the mode of the suggestion effect can be changed. For this reason, in the small hit game in which the suggestion effect during the small hit is executed, the game is enjoyed by inserting the game ball into the second large winning opening 35 and changing the mode (content of the suggestion) of the suggestion effect. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to attract the player to the suggestion effect when the small hit medium suggestion effect is executed, and to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the small hit medium suggestion effect executed in the state where the specific hold is stored has the identification information in the big hit mode (specific mode, first mode) in the variable display related to the specific hold. It is said that the effect of displaying the suggestion image 930 (suggestion information) regarding the suggestion of the possibility (expectation degree) of being displayed in the specific mode) (suggestion information display effect). Then, when the game ball enters the second large winning opening 35 during the execution of the small hit middle suggestion effect (suggestion information display effect), the display mode of the suggestion image 930 displayed in the suggestion effect (in this example, the star). The number of (★) displayed) can change. Therefore, in the small hit game in which the small hit medium suggestion effect is executed, the game ball is inserted into the second large winning opening 35, and the display mode of the suggested image 930 being displayed (suggested expectation degree). It becomes possible to enjoy the game such as changing. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the suggestion effect during the small hit and to attract the player to the suggestion effect during the small hit.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation effects executed in the state C (effect mode C) include a normal fluctuation effect executed as a normal fluctuation, a reach-less deviation variation, or a reach-fluttering deviation variation, and a reach variation. There is a special variation effect that is executed as. Compared to the normal variation effect, the special variation effect is easier to be executed with the variation display of the identification information when the identification information is displayed in the jackpot mode (specific mode, first specific mode). For the player, it can be said that this is an effect that increases the possibility that the identification information is displayed in the jackpot mode. Then, the specific hold (predetermined acquisition information) stored when the small hit middle suggestion effect is executed is the second special figure hold (acquisition information) that triggers the execution of the variation display of the identification information accompanied by the special variation effect. It is said that. Therefore, when the small hit middle suggestion effect is executed during the small hit game, the player executes the variation display of the identification information accompanied by the special variation effect after the small hit game, that is, the identification information is a big hit. It is possible to know in advance that the special variation effect, which is more likely to be displayed in the mode, will be executed after the small hit game. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation and interest in the execution of the suggestion effect during the small hit.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the small hit game is executed (started), the special figure 2 is designated as the second special figure hold corresponding to the number of reserved balls "1" (end of the small hit game). When the predetermined acquisition information) is stored as the target of the second special symbol winning / failing determination to be executed first later, the small hit suggestion effect is executed during the small hit game. For this reason, when the small hit middle suggestion effect is executed in the small hit game, the fluctuation display of the first identification information executed after the end of the small hit game is the digestion of the specific hold (determination result of the predetermined acquisition information). It becomes a variable display based on. As a result, the suggestion effect during the small hit and the variation display (variation display based on the determination result of the predetermined acquisition information) that is the target of the suggestion by the suggestion effect are executed in a series, and the said from the small hit game. It is possible to enhance the interest of the variable display after the small hit game.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a small hit game (second special game) whose execution period is shorter than that of the 4R or 15R big hit game (first special game) is executed, a specific hold (2nd special game) is performed. When the predetermined acquisition information) is stored, it is possible to execute the small hit middle suggestion effect during the small hit game. Therefore, even when a small hit game with a short execution period is executed instead of a big hit game with a long execution period, it is possible to attract the player to the suggestion effect during the small hit in the small hit game. Become. This makes it possible to enhance the interest when a small hit game with a relatively short execution period is executed. In particular, since the state C (high accuracy and low base state) is a gaming state in which small hits can occur frequently, the chances of executing the small hit medium suggestion effect will increase accordingly. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game in the state C.

Although Examples 1 and 2 have been described above as embodiments of the present invention, the present invention is not limited thereto, and is limited to the wording of each claim as long as it does not deviate from the scope described in each claim. However, it extends to the extent that those skilled in the art can easily replace them, and it is possible to appropriately add improvements based on the knowledge that those skilled in the art usually have.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, in the 4R jackpot game and the 15R jackpot game in which the acquisition of a prize ball can be expected, the information display area 7s and the information display area 7s are displayed on the display screen 7a (round effect screen) of the image display device 7 while the round game progresses. The prize ball number image display unit 70 was provided, and the round winning prize ball number image was supposed to be displayed on the prize ball number image display unit 70 (information display area 7s). Instead, an information display area and a prize ball number image display unit are provided on either or both of the display screen 71a of the second image display device 71 and the display screen 72a (see FIG. 3) of the third image display device 72. The round winning prize ball number image may be displayed on the prize ball number image display unit (information display area). In this way, the display content of the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) during the jackpot game is specialized for the round effect, and the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) are specialized. ) Can be effectively used.

When both the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) are used for displaying the round winning prize ball number image, for example, one display device (display screen). ) Displays the image of the number of round winning prize balls related to the round game (for example, 1R to 7R) in the first half of the big hit game, and the other display device (display screen) displays the round game (for example, 8R to 15R) in the first half of the big hit game. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the image of the number of prize balls won in the round is displayed. Further, when the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) and / or the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) is used for displaying the round winning prize ball number image, for example, the jackpot generated in the state C After the jackpot game is completed, the display of the round winning prize ball number image (information display area) may be continued until the game state returns to the state A (normal game state), that is, until the end of the consecutive villa period. It is possible. By doing this, the image of the number of prize balls won in the round will continue to be displayed as the history during the consecutive villa period, so it will be possible to confirm after the fact how many round games the player has obtained, and the consecutive villa period. It is possible to enhance the interest of the inside. In addition, after the end of the big hit game (all-round game), until a predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes) elapses, or until a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) the variation display of the special symbol is performed, the round winning prize ball number image. It is also possible to configure the information display area in which is displayed so as to be displayed on a part of the display screen (variation effect screen) in which the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is displayed. In this case, an information display area in which the round winning prize ball number image is displayed may be displayed on a part of the display screen of any one of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. can. This also makes it possible to confirm after the fact how many round games the player has obtained.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the information display area 7s is displayed from the first round to the final round of the jackpot game, and the round game has been executed from the end of the first round until the interval time after the end of the final round elapses. The image of the number of prize balls won in the round was supposed to be displayed in the information display area 7s (the number of prize balls image display unit 70), but even after the interval time after the end of the final round has elapsed and the ending period has started. The display of the information display area 7s (prize ball number image display unit 70) on which the round winning prize ball number image is displayed may be continued. That is, even after the end of all round games, the display period is set so that the information display area 7s (prize ball number image display unit 70) on which the round winning prize ball number image is displayed is continuously displayed on a part of the ending effect screen. You may extend it. In this way, the player can grasp (visually recognize) the prize ball acquisition status in each round game by the round acquisition prize ball number display production and the prize ball acquisition status in each hit game by the ending acquisition prize ball number display production. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the ending period (ending production).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the round-winning prize ball number image, the three types of round-winning prize ball number images 701 to 703 shown in FIG. 59 (B) are provided, but the round-winning prize ball number image The embodiment is not limited to the embodiment, and any embodiment can be used as long as the number of prize balls can be suggested according to the number of prize balls won in the round. For example, as a round winning prize ball number image, an image (game ball image) imitating the outer shape of the game ball is provided, and the color of the image is determined by the number of round winning prize balls related to the executed round game. Round acquisition such as "blue" if it is less than the specified number of payments, "red" if it exceeds the specified number of payouts (specific amount) or less, and "gold" if it exceeds the specified number of payments. It may be made different according to the number of prize balls. Alternatively, the round winning prize ball number image may be composed only of a numerical image, and the round winning prize ball number (count value of the round prize ball counter CT3) may be displayed in the numerical image.

Further, in addition to the above-mentioned round winning prize ball number images 701 to 703, the round winning prize ball number image (fourth) corresponding to the case where the round winning prize ball number is less than the specified payout number (for example, less than 150). Display mode) may be provided. In this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the display of the round winning prize ball number image (round winning prize ball number display effect).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the maximum number of rounds of the jackpot game is 15R (15R jackpot), but the maximum number of rounds is not limited to this, and may be, for example, 16R or less than 15R (for example, 10R). Is also possible. Further, the jackpot type according to the number of rounds does not have to be the three types of 2R jackpot, 4R jackpot and 15R jackpot as in the above embodiment, for example, two types of 5R jackpot and 10R jackpot, or 7R jackpot. It is possible to provide various jackpot types such as one type. In this case, the size, number, design, etc. of the information display area, the prize ball number image display unit, the round winning prize ball number image, etc. for executing the round winning prize ball number display effect are the rounds of the big hit game that can be executed. It can be arbitrarily determined according to the number (specification of big hit, type).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of setting a high-accuracy low-base state (specific period) in which small hits can occur frequently as a game state, a round winning prize ball number display effect is produced during a big hit game. However, the round winning prize ball number display effect can be executed even during a big hit game of a pachinko gaming machine that does not have a high-accuracy low-base state. For example, one type of pachinko game machine called "Digi Pachi" that does not have a high accuracy and low base state, and two types of pachinko game machine called "Hanemono", one type and two types of specifications In a pachinko game machine that can perform a big hit game consisting of multiple round games, such as a mixed 1 type 2 type mixed type pachinko game machine, the above-mentioned round winning prize ball number display effect is displayed during the big hit game. It is possible to do it. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the big hit game of the pachinko gaming machine that does not have the high accuracy and low base state.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the ending winning prize ball number display effect, the small hit winning prize ball number image 901 is displayed in the first period of the ending period, and the big hit winning prize is displayed in the second period after the lapse of the first period. The ball number image 902 was displayed, and the total prize ball number image 903 was supposed to be displayed in the third period after the lapse of the second period. Not limited. For example, the big hit winning prize ball number image 902 is displayed in the first period, the small hit winning prize ball number image 901 is displayed in the second period, and the total winning prize ball number image 903 is displayed in the third period. It is also possible to do. Even with this, since the images of the number of winning prize balls are displayed step by step when the jackpot game is completed, it is possible to enhance the interest by displaying the images of the number of winning prize balls. Further, the total number of winning prize balls image 903 is displayed in the first period, the small hit winning prize ball number image 901 is displayed in the second period, and the big hit winning prize ball number image 902 is displayed in the third period. Or, the total number of winning prize balls image 903 is displayed in the first period, the big hit winning prize ball number image 902 is displayed in the second period, and the small hit winning prize ball number image 901 is displayed in the third period. It is also possible to do it. In this case, the player can know the total number of winning prize balls first, and then know the number of small hit winning prize balls and the number of big hit winning prize balls as a breakdown. This also makes it possible to attract the player's interest in displaying the image of the number of winning prize balls when the jackpot game ends. Further, it is also possible to display the total winning prize ball number image 903 between the display of the small hit winning prize ball number image 901 and the display of the big hit winning prize ball number image 902, that is, in the second period. be. In this case, since the display order of the acquired prize ball number images can be made unexpected, it becomes easy to attract the interest of the player.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, one image display device 7 (board side display means) is provided as a main display device on the game board side (inside the game area), and a sub display is provided on the game machine frame side (outside the game area). Although two image display devices 71 and 72 (frame-side display means) are provided as the devices, a sub-display device may be provided on the side of the game board 2. In this case, instead of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 shown in the above-described embodiment, one or two or more sub-display devices are used as the board-side display means on the game board side (for example, the image display device). It can be provided around (7), or one of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 can be eliminated and one sub-display device can be provided on the game board side instead. Alternatively, while providing the two sub-display devices (second image display device 71 and third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment, one or more sub-display devices may be further provided on the game board side. It is possible. This also makes it possible to display various effects with impact by the plurality of image display devices, and the various winning prize ball number images (game value information) described above can be displayed on the display screen of the sub-display device among the plurality of image display devices. ) Can be displayed in whole or in part.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set to one, but the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set. It may be multiple times or may have different open times. Even in this case, it is possible to display the round winning prize ball number image (round winning prize ball number display effect) every time one round is completed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the small hit medium suggestion effect that can be executed in the small hit game, the degree of expectation that the result of the variation display related to the specific hold will be the big hit mode (15R 3rd big hit or 4R 4th big hit) is starred. It is assumed that the suggestion image 930 suggested by the number of (★) is displayed, and the smaller the number of stars (★) included in the suggestion image 930, the more the fluctuation display related to the specific hold (the first fluctuation after the small hit game). (Display), 15R 3rd jackpot or 4R 4th jackpot or miss, that is, the possibility of continuation of state C (specific period) is high (the possibility of termination (risk) is low). , The mode of suggesting the degree of expectation (the mode of displaying the suggestion information) in the small hit medium suggestion effect is not limited to the examples. For example, contrary to the embodiment, the larger the number of stars (★) included in the suggestion image 930, the more the fluctuation display related to the specific hold (the first fluctuation display after the small hit game), the 15R third big hit, and the 4R third. 4 The possibility of a big hit or a miss, that is, the possibility of continuation of the state C (specific period) is high (the possibility of termination (risk) is low). In this case, the suggestion image (suggestion information) can be displayed together with the characters of the expectation degree instead of the risk degree as shown in FIG. 63. Also, in this case, the default number of stars (★) is set to one, and the number of stars (★) is increased based on the entry of the game ball into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game. Just do it. This also displays the expectation that the jackpot mode (excluding the 2R jackpot) will be displayed in the fluctuation display (the first fluctuation display after the small hit game) related to the specific hold, the continuation expectation of the state C, and the 2R jackpot mode. It is possible to suggest the degree of risk.

Further, the suggestion information suggesting the degree of expectation that the result of the fluctuation display related to the specific hold will be a big hit mode is not the number of stars (★) as in the suggestion image 930, but the quantified information (for example, 30% or 50). It can be displayed as a percentage (%, etc.), as a character's facial expression (for example, a smile, a normal face, a disappointing face, etc.), or as an image of a predetermined item or background according to the high or low expectations. It may be displayed. Also in this case, as in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to change the display mode of the numerical value, the facial expression of the character, the background, etc. based on the entry of the game ball into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game. It is possible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of stars (★) included in the suggestion image 930 is calculated for each ball entering the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game with the suggestion effect during the small hit. Although it was supposed to be reduced by one, the number of stars (★) may be reduced by one for each ball entered into the second large winning opening 35. For example, when the small hit medium suggestion effect is executed based on the third suggestion effect pattern (★ 5 → 2), the game ball is the second big winning opening during the small hit game accompanied by the small hit medium suggestion effect. The number of stars (★) included in the suggestion image 930 may be reduced by 3 from 5 to 2 when one ball is inserted in 35. In this way, if the number of balls entered into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game is less than the decrease in the number of stars (★) defined by the small hit medium suggestion effect pattern. Even so, it is possible to reduce the number of stars (★) according to the suggestion effect pattern during small hits. This also applies to the case of increasing the number of stars (★) described above.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, it is assumed that the suggestion effect (small hit medium suggestion effect) can be executed during the small hit game, but the hit game (special game) in which the suggestion effect is executed is not a small hit game. good. For example, as a hit game with a shorter execution period than a big hit game in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained in one big hit game such as 4R big hit or 15R big hit, a big prize opening (special) with the same open pattern as the small hit game. If a short round big hit game (for example, a 2R big hit game) is provided and the short round big hit game is executed in state C (high accuracy and low base state), the game after the short round big hit game is performed. The state is controlled by the state C. Then, when the specific hold is stored when the short round big hit game is executed in the state C, the suggestion effect can be executed during the short round big hit game in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment. It is possible. This also makes it possible to make suggestions regarding the variable display related to the specific hold after the short round big hit game during the short round big hit game.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, regarding the predetermined acquisition information stored as the specific hold, the acquisition information (special figure hold) including the fluctuation pattern information corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern is assumed to correspond to the predetermined acquisition information. It is also possible to determine the predetermined acquisition information based on the information other than the pattern information. For example, since the acquired information (production hold information) includes a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is correct (judgment information) and a random number for determining a jackpot type (big hit type information), the determination information is jackpot information and is a jackpot. Acquired information (special figure hold) whose type information is jackpot information may be designated acquisition information (specific hold). In this case, unlike the above-described embodiment, the specific hold does not deviate and fluctuate. Therefore, if the suggestion effect is executed during the small hit game, it is confirmed that the big hit will occur after the small hit game. Become. In this way, a 2R big hit or a big hit other than 2R will occur in the variable display immediately after the small hit game, so that it is possible to arouse the player's expectation and anxiety about the continuation or end of the state C.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the small hit game is executed, when the specific hold is stored as the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold ball number "1", the suggestion effect during the small hit is produced. However, when the specific hold is stored in any of the numbers "1" to "4" of the special figure 2 hold ball, the small hit medium suggestion effect may be executed. That is, when the specific hold is stored within the range of the upper limit of the hold storage, the small hit medium suggestion effect may be executed. In this way, the variation display related to the specific hold is not limited to the first variation display after the small hit game with the suggestion effect during the small hit, but the second to fourth times (within the range of the upper limit of the hold) after the small hit game. Since it can be executed as a variable display, it is possible to have a variation in the execution timing of the variable display related to the specific hold. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the pending digestion period after the small hit game accompanied by the suggestion effect during the small hit.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, it is determined that the small hit opening command has been received (YES in S5001) in the small hit hold look-ahead process (S5000), and the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is "1" or more (S). When it is determined (YES in S5003) that the second special figure hold is stored), and it is determined that the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold ball number "1" is a specific hold (a specific hold). S5005), the small hit medium suggestion effect pattern was set (S5007), and the small hit medium suggestion effect was supposed to be executed, but before the small hit medium suggestion effect pattern was set (before S5007), The sub-control unit may determine whether or not to execute the suggestion effect during the small hit (for example, a random number lottery). Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold ball number "1" is a specific hold (YES in S5005), then the small hit medium suggestion effect is executed. Whether or not it is determined, and as a result, when it is determined to be executed, the small hit medium suggestion effect pattern may be set so that the small hit medium suggestion effect is executed. In this way, when the small hit game is executed, even if the specific hold is stored as the second special figure hold corresponding to the special figure 2 hold ball number "1", the suggestion effect during the small hit is not necessarily made. Is not always executed. As a result, it is possible to raise the hurdle for executing the small hit medium suggestion effect, and further enhance the effect and interest of the small hit medium suggestion effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the small hit medium suggestion effect is executed as the display effect using the image display device 7 (display screen 7a), but the small hit medium suggestion effect is not limited to the display effect. No. For example, it is possible to execute a small hit medium suggestion effect as a movable effect using a movable decorative member (movable effect device), a sound effect using a speaker, or a light effect using lamps such as a board lamp or a frame lamp. It is possible. When executing the small hit medium suggestion effect as a movable effect, a plurality of operation patterns (movable suggestion effect patterns) having different operating amounts and operating ranges of the movable decorative members, the number of operations when there are a plurality of movable decorative members, etc. are provided. , It is possible to make a suggestion related to a specific hold by the operation pattern (movable suggestion effect pattern). In addition, when executing the small hit medium suggestion effect as a sound effect, a plurality of sound output patterns (sound suggestion effect patterns) having different types of output sound effects, songs, volume, sound pressure, etc. are provided, and the sounds are provided. The output pattern (sound suggestion effect pattern) makes it possible to make suggestions related to the specific hold. Further, when executing the small hit medium suggestion effect as a light effect, a plurality of light emission patterns (light suggestion effect patterns) having different emission colors, light amounts, blinking speeds, etc. of the lamps are provided, and the light emission patterns (light suggestion effect) are provided. (Pattern) makes it possible to make suggestions related to a specific hold. Even with these configurations, it is possible to attract the player to the suggestion effect during the small hit.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the state C (high accuracy and low base state) in which small hits occur frequently (small hit games are executed frequently) is present. Although the invention is applied, a pachinko game that does not have the state C and can perform a hit game (special game) such as a small hit game or a short round big hit game (for example, a 2R big hit game) with a relatively short execution period. The present invention can also be applied to machines. Further, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko gaming machine that does not have a small hit (small hit game).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the control process is capable of simultaneously digesting the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold (simultaneous fluctuation of the special figures 1 and 2), but the second special figure hold. As a control process (special figure 2 priority change) that preferentially digests the first special figure hold, and a control process (special figure 1 priority change) that preferentially digests the first special figure hold over the second special figure hold. May be good. In addition, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the oldest memorized one of the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold is digested in order. It may be a control process, a so-called ball entry order (memory order) digestion control process.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been exemplified by applying the present invention to one type of pachinko gaming machine that determines whether or not to activate the probability fluctuation function based on the type of jackpot symbol. It is not limited to. For example, the big winning opening (V attacker) is provided with a specific area (V area) as a probability change operation port, and a probability variation function is provided based on whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area (V passage) during the big hit game. It is possible to apply the present invention to one type of pachinko gaming machine (so-called “V confirmation machine”) that determines whether or not to operate. Alternatively, a game ball that has a specific area (V area) in the large winning opening that can be entered when the result of the special symbol winning / failing judgment is a small hit, and that has entered the large winning opening during the small hit game It is also possible to apply the present invention to a type 1 and type 2 type pachinko gaming machine in which a big hit is obtained when passing through a specific area (passing through V) and a big hit game is executed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the jackpot probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by inactivating / operating the probability fluctuation function, but the type (number) of the jackpot probability Is not limited to this, and for example, three or more kinds of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). May be good. Further, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , Multiple types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low probability and high probability are provided, and any of the multiple types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable) when the power of the game machine is turned on, for example. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) stored in the special figure hold storage unit is read out for the preliminary determination based on the starting ball, and the read acquired random number value (acquired information) is determined. Although it was supposed to be (preliminary judgment) ("Starting ball entry processing (S205)". See FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), the pre-judgment method is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage unit, a main control unit or a sub-control unit stores an area (acquisition information storage means) for storing acquisition information (that is, acquisition information acquired based on the start-in ball) to be determined in advance. It may be provided in the RAM of the unit and the acquired information stored in the storage area (predetermination storage unit) may be determined (predetermined). In this case, by storing the result of the pre-determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, it is possible to erase the acquired information (acquired information stored in another storage area) used for the pre-determination. Alternatively, instead of pre-determining the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, the acquired information acquired based on the starting ball may be pre-determined. That is, the acquired information may be determined in advance before being stored in the special figure reservation storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquired information to be pre-determined separately from the special figure reservation storage unit, and it is also necessary to read the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit for the pre-determination. No.

In addition, it is executed in association with a mode (variation mode, stop mode, reach effect mode, etc.) related to the variation display of the effect symbol shown in the above-described embodiment, and a small hit or a large hit in the state C (effect mode C). The modes of various productions (small hit game production, ball entry production, total winning prize ball number display production, round winning prize ball number display production, ending winning prize ball number display production, small hit medium suggestion production, etc.) are just examples. , The mode of the production according to the present invention is not limited to the examples.

[others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (Examples) disclosed in the present specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
Conventionally, when a game ball enters a predetermined entry port (for example, a start opening), a hit / fail judgment is made, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a specific result such as a big hit, a special game such as a big hit game can be executed. The game machine that becomes is known. In a special game, a special entry port (for example, a large winning opening), which is normally impossible for the game ball to enter, becomes available for entry, and a prize ball is awarded based on the entry into the entry opening. The game value such as is given to the player. Some gaming machines of this type are configured to display the number of prize balls (the amount of game value given to the player) acquired by the player in a special game (big hit game) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-221113 (see).

However, the conventional display of the number of prize balls as described above merely displays the total number of prize balls acquired by the player, and does not enhance the interest of the special game.

The present reference invention 1 was made in view of the above circumstances, and the purpose thereof is to enhance the interest of the special game by devising the display of information regarding the amount of the game value given in the special game. The purpose is to provide possible gaming machines.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
A pass / fail judgment means that can execute a pass / fail judgment,
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a specific result, and
A special entry port that allows a game ball to enter during the special game,
A game value-adding means capable of adding a predetermined game value based on the ball entering the special ball entrance, and
An information display means capable of displaying game value information suggesting the amount of game value given by the game value giving means is provided.
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games.
The information display means is characterized in that, during the special game, each time the round game is executed, the game value information related to the round game is displayed.

According to such a gaming machine, during the execution of the special game, each time each of the plurality of round games constituting the special game is executed, the game suggests the amount of the game value given in each round game. Value information is displayed. Therefore, as the special game progresses, the player can know the amount of the game value given (acquired) in the special game in round game units. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the amount of game value given in each round game and enhance the interest of the special game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 described above.
The information display means displays the game value information related to the executed round game in round game units until a predetermined display period including a predetermined period after the final round game is completed has elapsed. It is characterized by.

According to such a gaming machine, game value information related to the executed round game is displayed in units of round games until a predetermined display period including a predetermined period after the last round game in the special game elapses. .. Therefore, even after all the rounds of the special game are completed, the player can know the amount of the game value given (acquired) in each of the executed round games. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the result of each round game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 or 1-2 described above.
The special game is configured so that a predetermined amount of game value can be given to each round game.
The information display means is characterized in that when the amount of game value given in the round game exceeds the specified amount, the game value information is displayed in a special display mode different from the usual one.

According to such a gaming machine, when the amount of the gaming value given in the round game exceeds the specified amount, the display mode of the gaming value information is different from the usual one. Therefore, as the special game progresses, the player can know whether or not the amount of the game value given in each round game exceeds the specified amount by just looking at the game value information. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest to the game value information displayed for each round game and to give the player a sense of gain.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 described above.
When the amount of the game value given in the round game exceeds a specific amount larger than the specified amount, the information display means displays the game value information in a specific special display mode different from the special display mode. It is characterized by.

According to such a gaming machine, when the amount of game value given in a round game exceeds a specific amount larger than a specified amount, the game value information is displayed in a specific special display mode different from the above-mentioned special display mode. Will be done. Therefore, the player can know whether or not the amount of the game value given in each round game exceeds the specific amount by just looking at the game value information while the special game progresses. As a result, it becomes possible to further attract the player's interest to the game value information displayed for each round game.

According to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 1, it is possible to enhance the interest of the special game.

(Reference Invention 2)
Conventionally, when a game ball enters a predetermined entry port (for example, a start opening), a hit / fail judgment is made, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a specific result such as a small hit or a big hit, a small hit game or a big hit game There are known gaming machines that can perform special games such as. In a special game, a special entry port (for example, a large winning opening), which is normally impossible for the game ball to enter, becomes available for entry, and a prize ball is awarded based on the entry into the entry opening. The game value such as is given to the player. Some gaming machines of this type are configured to display the number of prize balls (the amount of game value given to the player) acquired by the player in the special game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-221113). See publication).

However, the conventional display of the number of prize balls as described above merely displays the total number of prize balls acquired by the player, and is uninteresting.

The present reference invention 2 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest by displaying information on the amount of gaming value given in a special game. It is in.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
Identification information display means that can display identification information in a variable manner,
A first special game execution means capable of executing the first special game based on the identification information being displayed in the first specific mode after the variable display, and
A second special game execution means capable of executing the second special game based on the identification information being displayed in the second specific mode after the variable display, and
The first special entrance where the game ball can enter in the first special game, and
The second special entry port, which allows the game ball to enter in the second special game,
A game value-adding means that gives a predetermined amount of game value when a game ball enters the first special entrance and a game ball enters the second special entrance.
A first counting means capable of counting the amount of game value given based on the entry of a ball into the first special entrance in the first special game.
A second counting means capable of counting the amount of game value given based on the entry into the second special entrance in the second special game.
An information display means capable of displaying game value information suggesting the amount of game value given by the game value giving means is provided.
When the first special game ends, the information display means receives the first game value information based on the counting result of the first counting means related to the first special game and the first game value information as the game value information. It is characterized in that it is possible to display the second game value information based on the counting result of the second counting means related to the second special game executed in a specific period before the special game is executed. be.

According to such a gaming machine, when the first special game is executed, the amount of the game value given based on the entry into the first special entrance in the first special game is counted. In addition, when the second special game is executed in a specific period before the first special game is executed, the game value given based on the entry into the second special entrance in the second special game The amount is counted. Then, based on the counting results of each of them, the first game value information suggesting the amount of the game value given in the first special game and the second special game in the specific period before the first special game are given. The second game value information suggesting the amount of the game value is displayed at the end of the first special game. Therefore, when the first special game is completed, the player has the amount of the game value given (acquired) in the first special game and the second special game in the specific period before the first special game. It becomes possible to know separately the amount of game value given (acquired) in. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest by displaying the game value information when the first special game ends.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 described above.
The information display means is characterized in that one of the first game value information and the second game value information is displayed first and the other is displayed later.

According to such a gaming machine, when the first special game ends, either one of the first game value information and the second game value information is displayed first, and the other is displayed later. Therefore, the player knows in order the amount of the game value given in the first special game and the amount of the game value given in the second special game in the specific period before the first special game. You will be able to do it. This makes it easier for the player to grasp the result of each special game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or 2-2 described above.
When the first special game ends, the information display means includes the counting result of the first counting means related to the first special game and the second execution executed in the specific period as the game value information. It is characterized in that the third game value information based on the total result with the counting result of the second counting means related to the special game can be displayed.

According to such a gaming machine, the total amount of the game value given in the first special game and the amount of the game value given in the second special game in the specific period before the first special game are totaled. The third game value information suggesting the game value amount is displayed. Therefore, when the first special game ends, the player has the amount of the game value given in the first special game and the game given in the second special game in the specific period before the first special game. It becomes possible to know the amount of value and the total amount of game value given in both special games separately. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the interest of displaying the game value information when the first special game ends.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 described above.
The information display means is characterized in that the third game value information is displayed after displaying the first game value information and the second game value information.

According to such a gaming machine, after finishing the display of the first game value information and the display of the second game value information, the third game value information is displayed. Therefore, after the player knows the amount of the game value given in the first special game and the amount of the game value given in the second special game in the specific period before the first special game, both of them. You will be able to know the total amount of game value given in the special game. As a result, it becomes possible to further attract the player's interest in the display of the game value information when the first special game ends.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 2-1 to 2-4 described above.
The first special game is a big hit game,
The second special game is a small hit game,
The possibility that the identification information is displayed in the second specific aspect is higher than the possibility that the identification information is displayed in the first specific aspect.
The specific period is characterized in that the frequency at which the identification information is displayed in the second specific aspect is higher than that of the non-specific period.

According to such a gaming machine, the small hit game is executed more than the big hit game because the possibility that the identification information is displayed in the second specific mode is higher than the possibility that the identification information is displayed in the first specific mode. It will be easier. Further, in the specific period, the frequency with which the identification information is displayed in the second specific mode is higher than in the non-specific period, and the execution frequency of the small hit game is also increased accordingly. Therefore, while the small hit game is frequently executed in a specific period, the identification information is displayed in the first specific mode, and when the big hit game is executed, when the big hit game ends, the big hit game The first game value information is displayed as information suggesting the amount of the given game value, and the second game value information is displayed as information suggesting the amount of the game value given in the small hit game in the specific period. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the display of the game value information performed at the end of the jackpot game when the jackpot game is executed after a specific period, and to enhance the interest of the player.

According to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 2, it is possible to enhance the interest by displaying information on the amount of game value given in the special game.

(Reference Invention 3)
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which when a game ball enters a predetermined entry port (for example, a start opening), the identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and when the game ball is stopped and displayed at the hit symbol, a special game can be executed. In a special game, a special entry port (for example, a large winning opening), which is normally impossible for the game ball to enter, becomes available for entry, and a prize is awarded based on the entry into the entry opening. The game value of a ball or the like is given to the player. In this type of gaming machine, at the time when the special game is started, whether or not the gaming state after the special game is in the probability fluctuation mode is hidden, and whether or not the special game is in the probability fluctuation mode is set. (For example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-313111).

However, the progress of special games whose main purpose is to add (acquire) game value such as prize balls is relatively monotonous, and the production performed during the special games tends to be uniform. For this reason, the conventional gaming machine has room for improvement in enhancing the interest of the game.

The present reference invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and the purpose thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of attracting players to the production performed during a special game and enhancing the interest of the game. To provide.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
An acquisition means that can acquire acquisition information based on the establishment of predetermined conditions,
A storage means that can store the acquired information acquired by the acquisition means, and a storage means that can store the acquired information.
A determination means capable of determining the acquired information and
A variable display means for variable display of identification information based on the result of the determination,
Based on the fact that the identification information is displayed in a specific manner after the variable display, a special game execution means capable of executing a special game that enables the game ball to enter the special entrance port, and a special game execution means.
It is equipped with a production execution means that can execute a production related to the game.
The effect executing means is
When the predetermined acquisition information is stored in the storage means when the special game is executed, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that gives a suggestion related to the predetermined acquisition information during the special game.
During the execution of the suggestion effect, it is possible to change the mode of the suggestion effect based on the ball entering the special ball entrance.

According to such a gaming machine, when the identification information that is variablely displayed based on the result of the determination of the acquired information is displayed in a specific mode, the special gaming that enables the gaming ball to enter the special entrance. Is executed. Under these circumstances, when the predetermined acquisition information is stored when the special game is executed, a suggestion effect that gives a suggestion related to the stored predetermined acquisition information can be executed during the special game. By executing the suggestion effect during the special game, the player can store the predetermined acquisition information in the storage means and display the variation of the identification information based on the determination result of the predetermined acquisition information after the special game. It becomes possible to know in advance that it will be executed. Then, when the game ball enters the special entrance during the execution of the suggestion effect (during the special game), the mode of the suggestion effect can be changed. Therefore, in the special game in which the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to enjoy the game in which the game ball is inserted into the special entrance and the mode (content of the suggestion) of the suggestion effect is changed. As a result, it is possible to attract the player to the suggestion effect when the suggestion effect is executed in the special game, and to enhance the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 described above.
The suggestion effect is an effect of displaying suggestion information regarding the possibility that the identification information, which is variablely displayed based on the determination result of the predetermined acquisition information, is displayed in the specific mode.
It is possible that the effect executing means can change the display mode of the suggestion information displayed in the suggestion effect based on the ball entering the special entry port during the execution of the suggestion effect. It is a feature.

According to such a gaming machine, in the suggestion effect that can be executed during a special game in which the predetermined acquisition information is stored, the identification information that is variablely displayed based on the determination result of the predetermined acquisition information is a specific mode. It is said to be an effect of displaying suggestion information regarding the suggestion of the possibility (expectation degree) displayed in (suggestion information display effect). Then, when the game ball enters the special entrance during the execution of the suggestion effect (suggestion information display effect), the display mode of the suggestion information displayed in the suggestion effect may change. For this reason, in the special game in which the suggestion effect is executed, the game is enjoyed by inserting the game ball into the special entrance and changing the display mode (suggested expectation) of the suggestion information being displayed. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the suggestion effect and attract the player to the suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or 3-2 described above.
The effect executing means can execute the variable effect according to the variable display of the identification information.
The variable effect includes a normal variable effect and a special variable effect.
The special variation effect is more likely to be executed with the variation display of the identification information when the identification information is displayed in the specific mode, as compared with the normal variation effect.
The predetermined acquired information is characterized in that it is acquired information that triggers execution of the variation display of the identification information accompanied by the special variation effect.

According to such a gaming machine, the variation effect executed in association with the variation display of the identification information may be executed as a normal variation effect or as a special variation effect. Since the special variation effect is easier to be executed with the variation display of the identification information when the identification information is displayed in a specific mode as compared with the normal variation effect, the identification information is specified for the player. It can be said that this is an effect that increases the possibility of being displayed in a mode. The predetermined acquisition information stored when the suggestion effect is executed during the special game is the acquired information that triggers the execution of the variation display of the identification information accompanied by the special variation effect. Therefore, when the suggestion effect is executed during the special game, the player executes the variation display of the identification information accompanied by the special variation effect after the special game, that is, the identification information is displayed in a specific mode. It is possible to know in advance that the special variation effect, which is more likely to be performed, will be executed after the special game. This makes it possible to raise the player's expectations and interest in the execution of the suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-3 described above.
The effect executing means is a case where the predetermined acquisition information is stored in the storage means when the special game is executed, and the predetermined acquisition information is executed first after the end of the special game. It is characterized in that the suggestion effect can be executed when it is the target of the determination.

According to such a gaming machine, when a special game is executed, if predetermined acquisition information is stored as a target of determination to be executed first after the end of the special game, a suggestion effect is produced during the special game. Can be executed. Therefore, when the suggestion effect is executed during the special game, the variation display of the first identification information executed after the end of the special game becomes the variation display based on the determination result of the predetermined acquisition information. As a result, the suggestion effect during the special game and the variation display of the identification information that is the target of the suggestion by the suggestion effect (variation display based on the determination result of the predetermined acquisition information) are executed in a series, and the special game is executed. It is possible to enhance the interest from the inside to the variable display after the special game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 3-1 to 3-4 described above.
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game.
The execution period of the second special game is shorter than that of the first special game.
The effect executing means is characterized in that when the predetermined acquisition information is stored in the storage means when the second special game is executed, the suggestion effect can be executed during the second special game. Is to be.

According to such a gaming machine, when a predetermined acquisition information is stored when a second special game whose execution period is shorter than that of the first special game is executed, a suggestion effect is produced during the second special game. Can be executed. Therefore, even when the second special game with a short execution period is executed instead of the first special game with a long execution period, it is possible to attract the player to the suggestion effect in the second special game. It becomes. This makes it possible to enhance the interest when a special game with a relatively short execution period is executed.

According to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 3, it is possible to attract the player to the production performed during the special game and enhance the interest of the game.

1 pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game area, 7 image display device (first image display device), 7a display screen, 7b effect symbol display area (effect symbol display unit), 7s information display area, 8 effect symbol, 20 1st starting port, 21 2nd starting port, 30 1st big winning opening, 35 2nd big winning opening, 41a 1st special symbol display (1st special symbol display), 41b 2nd special symbol display ( 2nd special symbol display unit), 70 prize ball number image display unit, 71 2nd image display device, 71a display screen, 72 3rd image display device, 72a display screen, 75 2nd image display device hinge, 80 main control Board (main control unit), 90 sub-control board (sub-control unit), 100 image control board (image control unit), 701-703 round winning prize ball number image, 705 special image, 901 small hit winning prize ball number image, 902 jackpot winning prize ball number image, 903 total winning prize ball number image, 930 suggestion image.

Claims (4)

A pass / fail judgment means that can execute a pass / fail judgment,
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a specific result, and
A special entry port that allows a game ball to enter during the special game,
A game value-adding means capable of adding a predetermined game value based on the ball entering the special ball entrance, and
An information display means capable of displaying game value information suggesting the amount of game value given by the game value giving means is provided.
The special game is composed of a plurality of round games.
The information display means is a gaming machine that displays the game value information related to the round game each time the round game is executed during the special game. The information display means displays the game value information related to the executed round game in units of round games until a predetermined display period including a predetermined period after the final round game is completed has elapsed. The gaming machine according to claim 1. The special game is configured so that a predetermined amount of game value can be given to each round game.
Claim 1 or 2 is characterized in that, when the amount of game value given in the round game exceeds the specified amount, the information display means displays the game value information in a special display mode different from the usual one. The gaming machine described in. When the amount of game value given in the round game exceeds a specific amount larger than the specified amount, the information display means displays the game value information in a specific special display mode different from the special display mode. The gaming machine according to claim 3.

Images